MINI 2015 paceman User Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL.

MINI COUNTRYMAN.

MINI PACEMAN.

Contents

A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

COOPER

COOPER S

JOHN COOPER

WORKS

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control

you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. It

contains important information on vehicle operation that will

help you make full use of the technical features available in your

MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐

hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to

maintaining the value of your MINI.

Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐

chures in the onboard literature.

Set off now and have fun with your MINI.

The MINI Team of BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Aktiengesellschaft

Munich, Germany

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written

consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English II/15, 03 15 500

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached

without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

We wanted to provide you with some updates

and clarifications with respect to the printed

MINI Owner's Manual. These updates and clari-

fications will supersede the materials contained

in that document.

1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser-

vice center,” “your service center,” “service

specialist,” or “service” are used in the Ow-

ner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that the

terms refer to a MINI dealer's service center

or another service center or repair shop that

employs trained personnel that can perform

maintenance and repair work on your ve-

hicle in accordance with MINI specifications.

2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con-

tains an affirmative instruction to contact a

“service center” or “your service center,” we

wanted to clarify that MINI recommends

that, if you are faced with one of the situa-

tions addressed by that text, you contact or

seek the assistance of a MINI dealer's service

center or another service center or repair

shop that employs trained personnel that

can perform maintenance and repair work

on your vehicle in accordance with MINI

specifications.

While MINI, at no cost to you, will pay for re-

pairs required by the limited warranties pro-

vided with respect to your vehicle and for

maintenance under the Maintenance Pro-

gram during the applicable warranty and

maintenance coverage periods, you are free

to elect, both during those periods and the-

reafter, to have maintenance and repair

work provided by other service centers or

repair shops.

3. Where the Owner's Manual makes reference

to parts and accessories having been appro-

ved by MINI, those references are intended

to reflect that those parts and accessories

are recommended by MINI. You may elect

to use other parts and accessories, but, if

you do, we recommend that you make sure

that any such parts and/or accessories are

appropriate for use on your vehicle.

4. At page 6 and page 7, under the warranty

section's discussion of homologation, where

it states that you “cannot lodge warranty

claims for your vehicle there,” the text

should read that you “may not be able to

lodge warranty claims for your vehicle

there.”

5. At page 7, in the “Parts and accessories” sec-

tion, the sentence beginning “For your own

safety … ,” should be disregarded and the

following the text should be read in lieu the-

reof: “The manufacturer of your vehicle re-

commends using genuine MINI parts and

accessories.” In the fifth sentence of that pa-

ragraph, the word “cannot” should read

“does not.”

6. At page 39, in the “Checking and replacing

safety belts” section, the text beginning,

“Have the work performed only by your ser-

vice center …” should be disregarded and

the following text should be read in lieu the-

reof: “MINI recommends having this work

performed by a service center as it is impor-

tant that this safety feature functions pro-

perly.”

7. At page 112 under the heading: “Objects in

the area around the pedals” and at page

189 under the heading: “Carpets/floor

mats,” the paragraph that begins: “Only use

floor mats …” should be disregarded and

the following language should be read in

lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your ve-

hicle recommends that you use floor mats

that have been identified by it as appropri-

ate for use in your vehicle and that can be

properly fixed in place.”

8. At page 119, under the heading: “Have

maintenance carried out,” the sentence be-

ginning, “Have the maintenance carried

out …” should be disregarded and the fol-

lowing text should be read in lieu thereof:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Addendum

“MINI recommends that you have the main-

tenance carried out by your service center.”

9. At page 152, under the heading “Pressure

specifications,” the sentence beginning,

“The inflation pressures apply to the tire si-

zes approved … .” should be disregarded.

10. At page 159, under the heading: “Approved

wheels and tires,” the term “Approved”

should be disregarded and in lieu thereof,

the term “Recommended” should be read in

its place. In addition, the text of that section

should be disregarded and the following

text should be read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly

suggests that you use wheels and tires that

have been recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer for your vehicle type; other-

wise, for example, despite having the same

official size ratings, variations can lead to

body contact and with it, the risk of severe

accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not

evaluate non-recommended wheels and ti-

res to determine if they are suitable for use

on your vehicle.

11. At page 165, under the heading “Hood,” the

sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”

should be disregarded.

12. At page 169, under the heading: “Service

and Warranty Information Booklet for US

Models and Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian Models,” the second

paragraph should be disregarded and the

following text read in lieu thereof:

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that you have maintenance and re-

pair performed by your MINI dealer's service

center or another service center or repair

shop that employs trained personnel that

can perform maintenance and repair work

on your vehicle in accordance with MINI

specifications. The manufacturer of your ve-

hicle recommends that you maintain re-

cords of all maintenance and repair work

performed on your vehicle.

13. At page 179, under the “Battery replace-

ment” section, the text should be disregar-

ded and in lieu thereof the following text

should be read:

Use of recommended vehicle batteries

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-

mends that you use vehicle batteries that it

has tested and recommends for use in your

vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be da-

maged and systems or functions may not be

fully available.

After a battery replacement, the manufactu-

rer of your vehicle recommends that you

have the battery registered on your vehicle

by a service center to ensure that all comfort

functions are fully available, and that any

“check control” messages of these comfort

functions are no longer displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐

ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to

page 210.

6 Notes

AT A GLANCE

12 Cockpit

CONTROLS

20 Opening and closing

35 Adjusting

43 Transporting children safely

48 Driving

58 Displays

66 Lamps

71 Safety

81 Driving stability control systems

85 Driving comfort

88 Climate

94 Interior equipment

104 Storage compartments

DRIVING TIPS

110 Things to remember when driving

114 Loading

118 Saving fuel

ENTERTAINMENT

122 Radio MINI Boost CD

COMMUNICATION

136 Telephone

MOBILITY

148 Refueling

150 Fuel

152 Wheels and tires

164 Engine compartment

166 Engine oil

168 Coolant

169 Maintenance

171 Replacing components

181 Breakdown assistance

186 Care

191 Indicator/warning lamps

REFERENCE

206 Technical data

210 Everything from A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Notes

Using this Owner's

Manual

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐

ular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in

the first chapter.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any questions, your service

center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on MINI, e.g., on technology, is

available on the Internet: www.mini.com

Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is

available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com

Symbols

Indicates precautions that must be followed

precisely in order to avoid the possibility of

personal injury and serious damage to the

vehicle.

◄ Marks the end of a specific item of

information.

"..." Identifies radio display texts used to select

individual functions.

›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice

operation system.

››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the

voice operation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to

help protect the environment.

Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the

relevant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

Vehicle equipment

The manufacturer of your MINI is the Bayeri‐

sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft, BMW

AG.

This Owner's Manual describes all models, all

series equipment, as well as country-specific

and special equipment offered in the model

series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also de‐

scribes and depicts equipment that may not be

contained in your vehicle because of the se‐

lected special equipment or country version, for

example.

This also applies to safety-related functions and

systems.

For options and equipment not described in

this Owner's Manual, please refer to the Sup‐

plementary Owner's Manuals.

Status of this Owner's

Manual at time of print‐

ing

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a

policy of constant development that is con‐

ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to

embody the highest quality and safety stan‐

dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐

scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from

those in your vehicle.

For your own safety

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the

operating conditions and registration require‐

ments applying in the country of first delivery

— homologation. If your vehicle is to be oper‐

ated in a different country it might be neces‐

Seite 6

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differ‐

ing operating conditions and permit

requirements. If your vehicle does not comply

with the homologation requirements in a cer‐

tain country you cannot lodge warranty claims

for your vehicle there. Further information can

be obtained from your Service Center.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern

materials and high-performance electronics,

requires suitable maintenance and repair

methods.

Therefore, have this work performed only by a

MINI service center or a workshop that works

according to MINI repair procedures with ap‐

propriately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is

the danger of subsequent damage and related

safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

For your own safety, it is recommended that

you use genuine parts and accessories ap‐

proved by MINI. When you purchase accesso‐

ries tested and approved by MINI and Genuine

MINI Parts, you simultaneously acquire the as‐

surance that they have been thoroughly tested

by MINI to ensure optimum performance when

installed on your vehicle. MINI warrants these

parts to be free from defects in material and

workmanship. MINI will not accept any liability

for damage resulting from installation of parts

and accessories not approved by MINI. MINI

cannot test every product made by other man‐

ufacturers to verify if it can be used on a MINI

safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its

operation, or its occupants. Genuine MINI Parts,

MINI Accessories and other products approved

by MINI, together with professional advice on

using these items, are available from all MINI

centers. Installation and operation of non MINI

approved accessories such as alarms, radios,

amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension

components, brake dust shields, telephones,

including operation of any mobile phone from

within the vehicle without using an externally

mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment,

for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or

similar accessories, may cause extensive dam‐

age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter‐

fere with the vehicle's electrical system or af‐

fect the validity of the MINI Limited Warranty.

See your MINI center for additional informa‐

tion. Maintenance, replacement, or repair of

the emission control devices and systems may

be performed by any automotive repair estab‐

lishment or individual using any certified auto‐

motive part.

California Proposition 65 Warning

California laws require us to state the following

warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐

bile components and parts, including compo‐

nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐

cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐

fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐

tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐

ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐

lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐

pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used

engine oil contains chemicals that have caused

cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect

your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and

water.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication

thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐

lowing warranties:

▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.

▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.

Seite 7

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ California Emission Control System Limited

Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is

listed in the Service and Warranty Information

Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and

designed to meet the particular operating con‐

ditions and homologation requirements in your

country and continental region in order to de‐

liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is

operated under those conditions. If you wish to

operate your vehicle in another country or re‐

gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐

cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐

ditions and homologation requirements. You

should also be aware of any applicable war‐

ranty limitations or exclusions for such country

or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐

tomer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the

road safety, operational reliability and the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance meas‐

ures:

▷ MINI Maintenance system

▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet

for US models

▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for

Canadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to

these specifications, this could result in serious

damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not

covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐

ranty.

Data memory

Numerous electronic components in your vehi‐

cle contain data memories that store technical

information on the vehicle condition, events

and faults, either temporarily or permanently.

This technical information generally documents

the state of a component, a module, a system

or the environment:

▷ Operating conditions of system compo‐

nents, such as filling levels.

▷ Status messages from the vehicle and its in‐

dividual components, such as wheel rpm/

speed, motion delay, transverse accelera‐

tion.

▷ Malfunctions and defects in important sys‐

tem components, such as lights and brakes.

▷ Vehicle responses to special driving situa‐

tions, such as airbag deployment, use of

the stability control systems.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as the tempera‐

ture.

These data are of a technical nature only and

are used to detect and eliminate faults and to

optimize vehicle functions. Travel profiles of

routes driven with the vehicle cannot be cre‐

ated from these data. If services are used, for

instance in the event of repairs, service proc‐

esses, warranty cases, quality assurance, etc.,

this technical information can be read out from

the event and fault data memories by service

personnel, including the manufacturer, using

special diagnosis tools. This service personnel

can provide you with more information if

needed. After troubleshooting, the information

in the fault memory is cleared or overwritten

continuously.

Situations are conceivable during the use of the

vehicle in which these technical data could be‐

come associated with a specific person in com‐

bination with other information, such as an ac‐

cident report, damage to the vehicle, witness

accounts, etc., possibly with the involvement of

an authorized expert.

Additional functions that are contractually

agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐

calization in the event of an emergency, permit

the transfer of certain vehicle data out of the

vehicle.

Seite 8

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐

corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting

a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐

standing how a vehicle's systems performed.

The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record

such data as:

▷ How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.

▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.

▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better under‐

standing of the circumstances in which crashes

and injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐

corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐

tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,

age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce‐

ment, could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐

cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐

hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law

enforcement, that have the special equipment,

can read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned

and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause injury

or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North

America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New

Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone

1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your dealer,

or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐

rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.

You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐

rcar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a

safety- related defect to Transport Canada, De‐

fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone

the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can

also obtain other information about motor ve‐

hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐

ety.

Seite 9

Notes

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

WATCH ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Cockpit

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

All around the steering wheel

1 Setting the exterior mirror, folding it in and

out 40

Power windows, front 33

MINI Countryman: power win‐

dows, rear 33

MINI Countryman: safety switch

for rear power windows 34

2 Parking lights 66

Low beams 66

Automatic headlamp con‐

trol 66

Adaptive Light Control 68

Turn signal 51

Seite 12

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

High-beams 51

Headlight flasher 51

Roadside parking lights 67

Computer 59

3 Tachometer 59

Instrument lighting 69

Resetting the trip odometer 58

4 Washer/wiper system 52

5 Start/stop the engine and switch

the ignition on/off 48

6 Ignition lock 48

7 Steering wheel buttons, right

Resuming cruise control 86

Storing the speed and accelerat‐

ing or slowing down 86

Activating/deactivating cruise

control 85

Steering wheel buttons, left

Volume

Telephone 136

Change the radio station

Select a music track

Scroll through the redial list

8 Horn, the entire surface

9 Adjust the steering wheel 42

10 Releasing the hood 165

Seite 13

Cockpit

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Displays

1 Tachometer 59

with indicator and warning lights 15

2 Display for

▷ Current speed 58

▷ Indicator/warning lights 15

3 Resetting the trip odometer 58

4 Display for

▷ Steptronic transmission position 55

▷ On-board computer 59

▷ Service requirements 63

▷ Odometer and trip odometer 58

▷ Flat Tire Monitor 74

▷ Tire Pressure Monitor 76

▷ Settings and information 60

▷ Personal Profile settings 20

5 Instrument lighting 69

6 Speedometer with indicator and warning

lights 15

7 Fuel gauge 59

8 Radio display

9 Radio Radio MINI Boost CD 122

Seite 14

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Indicator/warning lights

The concept

The indicator and warning lights can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors in display

area 1 or 2.

Several of the lights are checked for proper

functioning when the engine is started or the

ignition is switched on, and light up briefly.

What to do in case of a malfunction

A list of all indicator and warning lights, as well

as notes on possible causes of malfunctions

and on how to respond, refer to page 191

All around the center console

1 Hazard warning system

2 Speedometer with

Radio MINI Boost CD 122

3 CD drive

4 Air conditioning, automatic climate con‐

trol 89

5 Buttons on the center console

Seite 15

Cockpit

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seat heating 37

Central locking, inside 25

Front fog lamps 69

Sport button 83

Driving stability control systems

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 81

DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 82

6 Storage compartment

All around the head‐

liner

1 Indicator/warning lights for the front pas‐

senger airbags 73

2 Reading lights 70

Ambient lighting color 70

Glass sunroof, electrical 31

Interior lights 69

All around the shift/

selector lever

1 AUX-IN port 130

USB audio interface 131

Seite 16

AT A GLANCE

Cockpit

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seite 17

Cockpit

AT A GLANCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

HANDLE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Remote control/key

Buttons on the remote control

1 Opening tailgate

2 Unlocking

3 Locking

General information

Each remote control contains a rechargeable

battery that is automatically recharged when it

is in the ignition lock while the car is being

driven. Use each remote control at least twice a

year for longer road trips in order to maintain

the batteries' charge status.

In vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the

remote control contains a replaceable battery,

refer to page 30.

The settings called up and implemented when

the vehicle is unlocked depend on which re‐

mote control is used to unlock the vehicle, Per‐

sonal Profile, refer to page 20.

In addition, information about service require‐

ments is stored in the remote control, Service

data in the remote control, refer to page 169.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

▷ Driver's door, refer to page 24.

New remote controls

You can obtain new remote controls from your

service center.

Loss of the remote controls

Lost remote controls can be blocked by your

service center.

Personal Profile

The concept

You can set several of your vehicle's functions

to suit your personal needs and preferences.

▷ Through Personal Profile, most of these set‐

tings are stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Seite 20

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ While the vehicle is being unlocked, the re‐

mote control is recognized and the settings

stored with it are called up and imple‐

mented.

▷ Your personal settings will be recognized

and called up again even if the vehicle has

been used in the meantime by someone

else with another remote control.

▷ The individual settings are stored for no

more than three remote controls.

Personal Profile settings

The following functions and settings can be

stored in a profile.

More information on the settings can be found

under:

▷ Response of the central locking system

when the car is being unlocked, refer to

page 22.

▷ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to

page 26.

▷ Triple turn signal activation, refer to

page 51.

▷ Settings for the displays in the speedometer

and tachometer:

▷ 12h/24h clock format, refer to

page 61.

▷ Date format, refer to page 61.

▷ Units of measure for fuel consumption,

distance covered/remaining distances,

and temperature, refer to page 61.

▷ Light settings:

▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature, refer

to page 68.

▷ Daytime running lights, refer to

page 67.

▷ Automatic climate control, refer to

page 90: AUTO program, activating/deac‐

tivating the cooling function, setting the

temperature, air volume, and air distribu‐

tion.

▷ Entertainment:

▷ Last entertainment source.

▷ Radio MINI Boost CD:

Tone settings, refer to page 124.

Volume, refer to page 124.

Central locking system

The concept

The central locking system becomes active

when the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and re‐

leases the locks on the following:

▷ Doors.

▷ Tailgate.

▷ Fuel filler flap.

Operating from the outside

▷ Via the remote control.

▷ Via the door lock.

▷ In cars with Comfort Access, via the door

handles on the driver's and front passenger

sides.

The following takes place simultaneously when

locking/unlocking the vehicle via the remote

control:

▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

anti-theft protection is switched on and off

as well. The anti-theft protection makes it

impossible to unlock the doors using the

lock buttons or door handles.

▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps, and

ambient lighting are switched on and off.

▷ The alarm system is armed or disarmed, re‐

fer to page 30.

Operating from the inside

Via the switch/button for the central locking

system, refer to page 25.

In an accident of the necessary severity, the

central locking system unlocks automatically.

Seite 21

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

The hazard warning system and interior lamps

come on.

Opening and closing:

from the outside

Using the remote control

General information

Take the remote control with you

People or animals left unattended in a

parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐

side. Always take the remote control with you

when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle

can then be opened from the outside.◀

Unlocking

Press the button. The vehicle is un‐

locked.

The welcome lamps and interior lamps are

switched on.

You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐

cator lever until the display changes.

4. Press the button in the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until the symbol and "SET" are

displayed.

5. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐

cator lever until the display changes.

6. Press the button in the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until the symbol shown is dis‐

played, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐

cator lever until the display changes.

8. Press the button in the turn indicator lever

repeatedly to select the following settings:

▷

Selected setting:

Pressing the button on the re‐

mote control once unlocks only the

driver's door and the fuel filler flap.

Pressing twice unlocks the entire vehi‐

cle.

▷

Selected setting:

Seite 22

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Pressing the button on the re‐

mote control once unlocks the entire

vehicle.

9. Press and hold the button in the turn indi‐

cator lever until the display changes. The

setting is stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Convenient opening

Press and hold the button on the re‐

mote control.

The power windows are opened. Depending on

the vehicle equipment, the glass sunroof is

raised.

Convenient closing with the remote control is

not possible.

Locking

Press the button.

Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be

unlocked from inside without special knowl‐

edge.◀

Setting the confirmation signals

Have unlocking or locking of the vehicle con‐

firmed.

Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button to select, arrow:

▷ Confirmation signal during unlock‐

ing

▷ Confirmation signal during locking

7. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

8. Press the button to select:

▷

The hazard warning system flashes dur‐

ing unlocking/locking.

▷

An acoustic signal sounds during un‐

locking/locking.

▷

The hazard warning system lights up

and an acoustic signal sounds during

unlocking/locking.

Seite 23

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷

The function is deactivated.

9. Press and hold the button until the display

changes. The setting is stored.

Switching on the interior lamps

When the vehicle is locked:

Press the button.

You can also use this function to locate your ve‐

hicle in parking garages, etc.

Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button for approx. 1 second

and then release it.

Malfunctions

The function of the remote control may be im‐

paired by local radio waves. If this occurs, un‐

lock and lock the vehicle at the door lock with

the integrated key.

If it should become impossible to lock the vehi‐

cle with a remote control, the battery in the re‐

mote control is discharged. Use this remote

control on an extended trip to recharge the

battery, refer to page 20.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with

part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

Commission regulations. Operation is governed

by the following:

FCC ID:

LX8766S

LX8766E

LX8CAS

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐

ence, and

▷ this device must accept any interference re‐

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to

these devices could void the user's authority to

operate this equipment.

Using the door lock

Sets how the vehicle is to be unlocked, refer to

page 22.

In some vehicle equipment versions, only the

driver's door can be unlocked and locked via

the door lock.

Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if

there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be

unlocked from inside without special knowl‐

edge.◀

Unlocking the doors and tailgate at

once

To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap, and the tail‐

gate at once:

With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐

ing the button for the central locking sys‐

tem in the interior, refer to page 25.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐

senger door, refer to page 25.

3. To lock the vehicle:

Seite 24

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Lock the driver's door using the

integrated key in the door lock, or

▷ Press down the lock button of the front

passenger door and close the door

from the outside.

Convenient opening and closing

In vehicles with an alarm system or Comfort Ac‐

cess, the windows and the glass sunroof can be

operated via the door lock.

Opening/closing

Turn the key to the unlock or lock position and

hold it there.

Keep the closing area clear

Watch during the opening and closing

process to be sure that no one becomes trap‐

ped. Releasing the key stops the motion.◀

Manual operation

If an electrical malfunction occurs, the driver's

door can be unlocked or locked by turning the

integrated key to the end positions of the door

lock.

Opening and closing:

from the inside

Operation via

▷ Switch in the center console:

▷ Button in the driver's or front passenger

door:

The graphic shows the button in the MINI Pace‐

man as an example.

The switch or the buttons can be used to lock

or unlock the doors and tailgate when the

doors are closed, but they are not theft-pro‐

tected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Unlocking and opening doors

▷ Using the switch or the buttons for the cen‐

tral locking system, unlock all of the doors

at once and then pull the door opener

above the armrest, or

▷ Pull the door handle on each door twice:

the door is unlocked the first time and

opened the second time.

Locking

▷ Press the switch/button or

▷ Push down the lock button of a door. To

avoid locking yourself out by accident, the

driver's door cannot be locked at the lock

button while the door is open.

Seite 25

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Automatic locking

In addition, it is possible to set the situations in

which the vehicle locks. The setting is stored for

the remote control in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

8. Press the button to select:

▷

The central locking system locks auto‐

matically after some time if no door is

opened.

▷

The vehicle locks automatically after

you drive away.

▷

The vehicle locks automatically after a

short period of time if a door is not

opened or after you drive away.

▷

The central locking system remains un‐

locked.

9. Press and hold the button until the display

changes. The setting is stored.

Tailgate

Opening

The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens.

Ensure that adequate clearance is available be‐

fore opening.

Provide edge protection

Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear

window while driving and damage the heating

wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐

tion.◀

Only drive with the tailgate fully closed; other‐

wise, the tail lamps will be hidden from view

and driving safety will be compromised.

In some market-specific versions, the tailgate

can only be unlocked using the remote control

if the vehicle was unlocked first.

Seite 26

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Opening from the inside

Press the button on the driver's footwell.

MINI Countryman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,

Press the button on the remote control

for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is

unlocked.

MINI Paceman

Press the top half of the MINI emblem, arrow,

Press the button on the remote control

for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate is

unlocked.

Closing

Keep the closing area clear

Make sure that the closing area of the

tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage

may result.◀

Take the remote control with you

Always take the remote control with you

when leaving the vehicle and do not place it in

the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control

may be locked into the vehicle when the tail‐

gate is closed.◀

Move the cover into position

When closing, ensure that the cargo cover

is resting on the rubber buffers of the securing

straps; otherwise, damage may occur when

closing the tailgate.◀

MINI Countryman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate

can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐

gate.

Seite 27

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Paceman

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate

can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐

gate.

Comfort Access

The concept

The vehicle can be accessed without activating

the remote control. All you need to do is to

have the remote control with you, e.g., in your

jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically de‐

tects the remote control when it is nearby or in

the passenger compartment.

Comfort Access supports the following func‐

tions:

▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.

▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.

▷ Starting the engine.

Functional requirements

▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐

ence in the vicinity.

▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control

must be located outside of the vehicle.

▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not

possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐

mote control is inside the vehicle.

▷ The doors and tailgate must be closed to

operate the windows.

Comparison with ordinary remote

control

The functions can be controlled by pressing the

buttons or via Comfort Access.

Notes on opening and closing, refer to page 20.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or

closing the windows or glass sunroof, the sys‐

tem is checking whether a remote control is in‐

side the vehicle. Repeat the opening or closing

procedure, if necessary.

Unlocking

Press button 1.

Depending on the setting, either only the driv‐

er's door or the entire vehicle is unlocked, refer

to page 22.

Pressing the button again locks the entire vehi‐

cle again.

Convenient opening with the remote control,

refer to page 23.

Locking

Press button 1.

For Convenient closing, press and hold but‐

ton 1.

The windows and, if applicable, the glass sun‐

roof are closed in addition.

Unlocking the tailgate separately

Press the top half of the MINI emblem.

This corresponds to pressing the following but‐

ton on the remote control:

Seite 28

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

If a remote control accidentally left in the cargo

area is detected in the locked vehicle after the

tailgate is closed, the tailgate opens again

slightly. The hazard warning system flashes and

an acoustic signal sounds.

Power windows and electrical glass

sunroof

When the engine is switched off, the windows

and the sunroof can be operated as long as

neither the doors nor the tailgate are opened.

When the door and tailgate are closed again

and the remote control is detected inside the

vehicle, the windows and the sunroof can be

operated again.

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

to be able to operate the windows and the sun‐

roof while the engine is switched off and the

doors are open.

Switching on the radio ready state

Press the Start/Stop button to switch on the

radio ready state, refer to page 48.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other‐

wise, the engine will start.

Starting the engine

The engine can be started or the ignition can

be switched on, refer to page 48, when a re‐

mote control is inside the vehicle. It is not nec‐

essary to insert a remote control into the igni‐

tion lock.

Switching off the engine in cars with

Steptronic transmission

The engine can only be switched off with the

selector lever in position P, refer to page 55.

To switch off the engine with the selector lever

in position N, the remote control must be in‐

serted in the ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with Steptronic

transmission into a car wash

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition

switch.

2. Depress the brake pedal.

3. Move the selector lever to position N.

4. Switch the engine off.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction

The Comfort Access functions can be disturbed

by local radio waves, such as by a mobile

phone in the immediate vicinity of the remote

control or when a mobile phone is being

charged in the vehicle.

If this occurs, open or close the vehicle using

the buttons on the remote control or use the

integrated key in the door lock.

To start the engine afterward, insert the remote

control into the ignition switch.

Warning lights

The warning light in the instrument

cluster lights up when you attempt to

start the engine: the engine cannot be

started.

The remote control is not in the vehicle or has a

malfunction. Take the remote control with you

inside the vehicle or have it checked. If neces‐

sary, insert another remote control into the ig‐

nition switch.

The warning lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up while the engine is run‐

ning: the remote control is no longer in‐

side the vehicle.

After switching off the engine, the engine can

only be started again within approx. 10 sec‐

onds if no door has been opened.

The indicator lamp lights up: replace

the remote control battery.

Seite 29

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Replacing the battery

The remote control for Comfort Access contains

a battery that will need to be replaced from

time to time.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Insert a new battery with the positive side

facing upwards.

3. Press the cover closed.

Return used battery to a recycling center

or to your service center.

Alarm system

The concept

The enabled alarm system reacts to the follow‐

ing:

▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.

▷ Movements inside the vehicle.

▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐

tempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

▷ Interruptions in battery voltage.

Depending on the market-specific version, the

alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry

attempts by:

▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.

▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

General information

When the vehicle is locked and unlocked, the

alarm system is armed and disarmed at the

same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system

Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the

alarm on some market-specific versions.

To stop this alarm, unlock the vehicle with the

remote control or switch on the ignition.

Tailgate with armed alarm system

The tailgate, refer to page 24, can also be

opened when the alarm system is armed.

Press the button on the remote con‐

trol.

When you subsequently close the tailgate, it is

again locked and monitored.

Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the

alarm on some market-specific versions.

Switching off the alarm

▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐

trol, refer to page 22.

▷ Insert the remote control all the way into

the ignition lock.

▷ With Comfort Access and if you are carrying

the remote control with you, push the but‐

ton on the door lock.

Display on the tachometer

When the alarm system is being armed, all LEDs

pulse like a heartbeat. One LED flashes after

approx. 16 minutes.

Seite 30

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ LEDs pulse or LED flashes: system is armed.

▷ One LED flashes at short intervals: the

doors, hood, or tailgate is not properly

closed.

Even if these are not closed fully, the re‐

maining items are locked and the LEDs

pulse after approx. 10 seconds for approx.

16 minutes; afterwards, one LED flashes.

The interior motion sensor is not activated.

▷ The LEDs go out after the vehicle is un‐

locked: the vehicle has not been tampered

with in the meantime.

▷ The LEDs flash after the vehicle is unlocked

until the remote control is inserted in the

ignition, but for no longer than approx.

5 minutes: the vehicle has been tampered

with in the meantime.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find

yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the remote control

for at least two seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button on the

remote control.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as

attempts to steal a wheel or tow the car.

Interior motion sensor

For the interior motion sensor to function prop‐

erly, the windows and the glass sunroof must

be closed.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐

lowing situations:

▷ In duplex garages.

▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at

sea or on a trailer.

▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor

▷

Press the button on the remote

control twice in succession.

▷ Lock the vehicle twice with the integrated

key.

The LEDs flash in short succession for approx.

2 seconds. The tilt alarm sensor and interior

motion sensor remain switched off until the ve‐

hicle is unlocked and locked again.

Glass sunroof, electrical

General information

Danger of pinching

Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is

clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐

ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐

selves.◀

Convenient operation via:

▷ Door lock, refer to page 24

Seite 31

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Comfort Access, refer to page 28

Tilting the glass sunroof

MINI Countryman:

▷ Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold.

Both glass sunroofs are raised.

Releasing stops the motion.

▷ With the ignition switched on, press the

switch back past the resistance point.

Both closed glass sunroofs are raised fully.

Pressing again stops the motion.

MINI Paceman:

▷ Press the switch back to the resistance

point and hold.

The front glass sunroof is raised.

Releasing stops the motion.

▷ With the ignition switched on, press the

switch back past the resistance point.

The front glass sunroof is fully raised.

Pressing again stops the motion.

Opening, closing

MINI Countryman:

▷ In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back and

hold.

The front glass sunroof is opened. The rear

glass sunroof is closed.

Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glass

sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐

ward.

The front glass sunroof remains in the raised

position. The rear glass sunroof is raised. Press‐

ing again closes both sunroofs completely.

MINI Paceman:

▷ In the raised position with the ignition

switched on, press the switch back and

hold.

The front glass sunroof is opened.

Releasing stops the motion.

The same method is used to close the glass

sunroof, in this case by pressing the switch for‐

ward.

The front glass sunroof remains in the raised

position. Pressing again closes the roof com‐

pletely.

Roller sunblind

The roller sunblind can be opened and closed

separately from the glass sunroof.

After a power failure

After a power failure, it could happen that the

sunroof can only be raised. In this case, have

the system initialized. The manufacturer of your

MINI recommends having this work performed

by the service center.

Power windows

General information

Danger of pinching

Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is

clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 32

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐

ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐

jure themselves.◀

If, after having been opened and closed a num‐

ber of times in close succession, a window can

only be closed, the system is overheated. Let

the system cool down for several minutes with

the ignition switched on or the engine running.

Opening, closing

Front windows

To open:

▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically in

the radio ready state and higher.

Press again briefly to stop the opening pro‐

cedure.

To close:

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion.

MINI Countryman: rear windows

To open:

▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The

window opens while the switch is held.

▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance

point. The window opens automatically in

the radio ready state and higher.

To close:

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The

window closes while the switch is held.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically.

Pressing the switch stops the motion.

After the ignition is switched off

The windows can be operated for approx. 1 mi‐

nute after the remote control is removed or the

ignition is switched off.

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐

ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐

jure themselves.◀

Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a

window closes, the closing action is inter‐

rupted.

The window reopens slightly.

Seite 33

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐

tection

Even with the pinch protection system, check

that the window's closing path is clear; other‐

wise, the closing action may not stop in certain

situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

Do not use window accessories

Do not install any accessories in the range

of movement of the windows; otherwise, the

pinch protection system will be impaired.◀

Closing without the pinch protection

system

Danger of pinching

Monitor the closing process and make

sure that the closing path of the window is

clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

If there is an external danger or, for example, if

ice on the windows prevents a window from

closing normally, the window can be closed

manually.

Pull the switch past the resistance point and

hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and

the window reopens slightly if the closing

force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch past the resistance point

again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it

there.

The window closes without pinch protec‐

tion.

MINI Countryman: safety switch

With the safety switch, the rear windows are

prevented from being opened or closed via the

switches in the rear passenger area, such as by

children.

Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety

function is switched on.

Safety switch for rear operation

Press the safety switch when transporting

children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result

if the windows are closed without supervi‐

sion.◀

Seite 34

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Adjusting

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Sitting safely

The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐

tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

The seating position plays an important role in

an accident in combination with:

▷ Safety belts, refer to page 37

▷ Head restraints, refer to page 39.

▷ Airbags, refer to page 71.

Seats

Note before adjusting

Do not adjust the seat while driving

Never attempt to adjust the driver's seat

while driving. The seat could respond with un‐

expected movement and the ensuing loss of

vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀

Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear

Do not incline the backrest on the front passen‐

ger side too far to the rear during driving. Oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of sliding under the

safety belt in an accident. This would eliminate

the protection normally provided by the belt.◀

Front seat adjustment

Forward/backward

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat into

the desired position, arrows 2.

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward

or back slightly to make sure it engages prop‐

erly.

Height

Pull the lever up or push it down repeatedly, ar‐

rows 1, until the desired height is reached, ar‐

rows .

Backrest

MINI Countryman:

Seite 35

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight

to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

MINI Paceman:

Pull the lever, arrow 1, and apply your weight

to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary, ar‐

rows 2.

Lumbar support

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest

to obtain additional support in the lumbar re‐

gion.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup‐

plementary support to help you maintain a re‐

laxed, upright sitting position.

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an

example.

Turn the wheel to increase or decrease the cur‐

vature.

MINI Countryman: rear seat adjustment

Observe the following when adjusting

Do not adjust the rear seats during a trip;

otherwise, there is a risk of passenger injury.

Make sure that the locking mechanisms of the

rear seats engage properly. Otherwise the re‐

straining effect of the safety belts during an ac‐

cident could be reduced.◀

Forward/backward

Pull the lever and slide the seat into the desired

position.

Release the lever and move the seat slightly

forward or back so that it engages properly.

Backrest

Adjust the backrest tilt, refer to page 100.

Seite 36

CONTROLS

Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seat heating

Switching on

The temperature setting progresses one step

through its control sequence each time you

press the button. The maximum temperature is

reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐

nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐

cally with the temperature set last.

The temperature is reduced, if need be, down

to no heat in order to reduce the load on the

battery. The LEDs remain lit.

Switching off

Press the button longer.

Safety belts

Number of safety belts

Your vehicle has been fitted with four or five

safety belts for the safety of you and your pas‐

sengers.

However, they can only offer protection when

adjusted correctly.

Notes

Always make sure that safety belts are being

worn by all occupants before driving away.

Although airbags enhance safety by providing

added protection, they are not a substitute for

safety belts.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be

correct for adult seat occupants of every build if

the seat is correctly adjusted.

One person per safety belt

Never allow more than one person to

wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or

small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

Putting on the belt

Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly

across the lap and shoulders, as close to the

body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies

low around the hips in the lap area and does

not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt

can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal

impact and injure the abdomen.

The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub

on sharp edges, be routed over solid or breaka‐

ble objects, or be pinched.◀

Reduction of restraining effect

Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the

belt from fitting properly, and pull the shoulder

belt periodically to readjust the tension across

your lap; otherwise, the retention effect of the

safety belt may be reduced.◀

Buckling the belt

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Seite 37

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in

the belt buckle.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be

correct for adult seat occupants of every build if

the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 35.

Unbuckling the belt

Hold the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Securing the buckle tongues

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, slide

the buckle tongue up to the belt stop knob with

the clip.

When the outer rear seats are not occupied, the

buckle tongues of the rear seats can be slid up

to the cargo area trim with the clip.

This helps avoid annoying noises when driving.

MINI Countryman: center safety belt of

rear seat

The belt buckle embossed with the word CEN‐

TER is intended exclusively for use by passen‐

gers riding in the center position.

If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the

backrests must be locked, refer to page 101.

The safety belt will not have a restraining effect

if the backrest is not locked.

Belt holder in the headliner

The holder for the safety belt is located in the

headliner.

1 Opening for the safety belt

2 Holder for the small buckle tongue

Take the small buckle tongue out of the holder.

Move both buckle tongues downward.

Closing

Insert the small buckle tongue 2 of the safety

belt into the small belt buckle 3.

Opening

Press the red button on the small belt buckle 3

with buckle tongue 1.

When the center safety belt is locked:

Press the red button 3 with the buckle tongue

of the outer left safety belt.

Seite 38

CONTROLS

Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Putting on the belt

1 Large buckle tongue

2 Small buckle tongue

3 Small belt buckle

4 Large belt buckle

Buckle tongue 1 must be inserted in belt

buckle 4. Make sure you hear the buckle

tongue engage in the belt buckle.

Insert the buckle tongue into the belt buckle in

such a way that the belt lies smoothly against

the body of the buckled person and is not

twisted.

Stowing the center safety belt

If the center seat is not occupied, insert the belt

buckles 3 and 4 into the respective holders, ar‐

rows.

Move the buckle tongues to the belt holder on

the headliner, refer to page 38, and insert them

into the provided holders.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat

and front passenger seat

The indicator lamps light up and a sig‐

nal sounds. Check whether the safety

belt has been fastened correctly.

Damage to safety belts

In the case of strain caused by accidents or

damage:

Have the safety belts, including the safety belt

tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors

checked.

Checking and replacing safety belts

Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured

that this safety feature will function properly.◀

Head restraints

Correctly set head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the

risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

Adjusting the head restraint

Correctly adjust the head restraints of all

occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased

risk of injury in an accident.◀

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is

approx. at ear level.

MINI Countryman: the center rear head re‐

straint is not height adjustable.

Seite 39

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Height adjustment

To raise: pull.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push

the head restraint down until it engages.

MINI Countryman: additionally press button 2

on the rear head restraints only if you wish to

remove them.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be

sitting in the seat in question.

Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐

porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐

tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐

able.◀

Front

Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.

2. MINI Countryman: tilt the backrest back

slightly.

MINI Paceman: fold the backrest forward if

necessary.

3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐

straint all the way to the stop.

MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐

ton 2 using a suitable tool.

4. Pull out the head restraint.

5. Fold back the backrest.

Rear

1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as

possible.

2. Fold the backrest forward slightly.

3. Press button 1 and pull out the head re‐

straint all the way to the stop.

MINI Countryman: additionally press but‐

ton 2 using a suitable tool.

4. Pull out the head restraint completely.

5. Fold back the rear seat backrest.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

General information

The mirror on the passenger side is more

curved than the driver's mirror.

Estimating distances correctly

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not estimate the distance

to the traffic behind you based on what you see

in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an

accident.◀

Seite 40

CONTROLS

Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

At a glance

1 Adjusting

2 Selecting the left/right mirror

3 Folding the mirror in and out

Selecting a mirror

To change to the other mirror: slide the

mirror switch over.

Adjusting electrically

The setting corresponds to the direction

in which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manually

If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example,

press the edges of the mirror glass.

Folding the mirror in and out

Press button 3.

The mirror can be folded in up to a vehicle

speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

For example, this is advantageous

▷ In car washes.

▷ In narrow streets.

▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded

away manually.

Fold in the mirror in a car wash

Before entering an automatic car wash,

fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the

button; otherwise, they could be damaged, de‐

pending on the width of the vehicle.◀

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically

while the engine is running or the ignition is

switched on when the external temperature is

below a certain value.

Interior rearview mirror

To reduce the blinding effect from the rear

when driving at night: turn the knob.

Interior rearview and exterior mirrors,

automatic dimming feature

Two photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror frame, see arrow.

▷ On the back of the mirror.

For proper operation:

▷ Keep the photocells clean.

Seite 41

Adjusting

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Do not cover the area between the inside

rearview mirror and the windshield.

▷ Do not apply stickers to the windshield in

front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjusting

Do not adjust while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement

could result in an accident.◀

Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seating posi‐

tion.

3. Fold the lever back.

Do not use force to swing the lever back.

Do not use force to swing the lever back

up; otherwise, the mechanism will be dam‐

aged.◀

Seite 42

CONTROLS

Adjusting

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Transporting children safely

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

The right place for chil‐

dren

Notes

Children in the vehicle

Do not leave children unattended in the

vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐

selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the

doors.◀

Children should always be in the rear

Accident research shows that the safest place

for children is on the rear seat.

Transporting children in the rear

Transport children younger than 13 years

of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear

only, using child restraint fixing systems suita‐

ble for the age, weight, and height of the child;

otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in

an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a

safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint

fixing system can no longer be used, due to

their age, weight and size.◀

Installing child seats

Only install child seats in the rear when

the rear seat backrest is folded all the way back

and engaged; otherwise, there is an increased

risk of injury in an accident.◀

Children on the front passenger seat

Front passenger airbags

Should it be necessary to use a child restraint

fixing system on the front passenger seat,

make sure that the front and side airbags on

the front passenger side are deactivated, refer

to page 72.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags

If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger

airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there

is an increased risk of injury to the child when

the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐

straint fixing system.◀

Installing child re‐

straint fixing systems

Before mounting

MINI Countryman: before mounting a child re‐

straint fixing system on the rear seats, move

the seats into the rearmost positions.

Adjust the inclination of the center backrest to

that of the respective outer backrest.

After mounting the child restraint fixing system

on the respective outer rear seat, adjust the

backrest forward, if necessary, to ensure that

the backrest is in contact with the child re‐

straint fixing system. Rear seat backrests, refer

to page 100.

Seite 43

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Notes

Manufacturer's information for child re‐

straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing

systems, observe the information provided by

the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐

tective effect can be impaired.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating the airbags

After installing a child restraint fixing system on

the front passenger seat, ensure that the front,

side, and knee airbags on the front passenger

side are deactivated.

Deactivating the front passenger airbags

If a child restraint fixing system is used in

the front passenger seat, the front passenger

airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there

is an increased risk of injury to the child when

the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐

straint fixing system.◀

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint fixing system,

move the front passenger seat as far back as

possible and adjust its height to the highest po‐

sition to obtain the best possible position for

the belt and to offer optimal protection in the

event of an accident.

Do not change this seat position once it has

been set.

Child seat security

The graphic shows the MINI Countryman as an

example.

The rear safety belts and the safety belt for the

front passenger can be locked to prevent ex‐

tension in order to permit attachment of child

restraint fixing systems.

To lock the safety belt

Secure the child restraint fixing system with

the belt.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and

pull it taut against the child restraint fixing

system.

The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt

Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐

pletely.

Center safety belt: unlock belt buckle 3 in

addition, refer to page 39.

Guide the safety belt to the holder on the

headliner.

LATCH child restraint fix‐

ing system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

Seite 44

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Notes

Manufacturer's information for LATCH

child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fix‐

ing systems, observe the operating and safety

information from the system manufacturer;

otherwise, the level of protection may be re‐

duced.◀

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the

CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child

and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is

restrained by the internal harnesses.

Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐

chors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have

properly engaged and that the child restraint

fixing system is resting snugly against the back‐

rest; otherwise, the degree of protection of‐

fered may be reduced.◀

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out

of the area for the child restraint fixing system.

MINI Countryman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are

located at the points indicated by the arrows.

MINI Paceman

The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are

located at the points indicated by the arrows.

The corresponding symbol shows the

mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing

systems

Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐

fer to the operating instructions of the sys‐

tem.

2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐

erly connected.

Child restraint fixing

systems with an upper re‐

taining strap

Mounting points

LATCH mounting points

Only use the mounting points for the up‐

per LATCH retaining strap to secure child re‐

straint systems; otherwise, the mounting points

could be damaged.◀

Seite 45

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Countryman

There are two additional mounting points for

child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐

taining strap, arrows.

MINI Paceman

There are two additional mounting points for

child restraint fixing systems with an upper re‐

taining strap, arrows.

Guide of the upper LATCH retaining

strap

Retaining strap

Make sure the upper retaining strap does

not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as

it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the

strap will not properly secure the child restraint

fixing system in the event of an accident.◀

Outer seats:

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Cargo area floor

4 Hook for upper retaining strap

5 Mounting point

6 Backrest

7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐

ing system

MINI Countryman, center seat

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for upper retaining strap

4 Mounting point

5 Cargo area floor

6 Backrest

7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint fix‐

ing system

Seite 46

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point

1. Slide the head restraint upward.

2. Center seat: fold the cargo area floor for‐

ward.

3. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the supports of the head restraint.

4. Attach the upper retaining strap to the

mounting point with the hook.

5. Slide the head restraint into the bottom po‐

sition.

6. Pull the upper retaining strap taut.

MINI Countryman: lock‐

ing doors and windows

Rear doors

Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.

The door can now be opened from the outside

only.

Safety switch for power window

This locks the rear window switches so that the

windows cannot be operated from the rear.

Press the safety switch, refer to page 34.

Seite 47

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Driving

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control into the

ignition lock

Insert the remote control all the way into the

ignition lock.

Radio ready state is switched on. Individual

electrical consumers can operate.

Removing the remote control from the

ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control

out of the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of

the ignition lock as this may cause damage.◀

Before removing the remote control, push it all

the way in to release the locking mechanism.

The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Steptronic transmission

You can only take out the remote control if

transmission position P is engaged: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ig‐

nition on or off and starts the engine.

The engine starts when the Start/Stop button is

pressed and:

▷ Manual transmission: the clutch pedal is de‐

pressed.

▷ Steptronic transmission: the brake pedal is

depressed.

Radio ready state

Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Radio ready state is switched off automatically:

▷ When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock.

▷ With Comfort Access, refer to page 28, by

pressing the button on the door handle or

the

button on the remote control.

▷ After a certain period of time.

Seite 48

CONTROLS

Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Ignition on

All electrical consumers can operate. Most indi‐

cator and warning lights light up for different

lengths of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off,

switch off the ignition and any unnecessary

electronic systems/power consumers.

Radio ready state and ignition off

All indicator and warning lights in the displays

go out.

The ignition switches off automatically when

the driver's door is opened. Pressing the Start/

Stop button again switches the ignition back

on.

For example, the ignition is not switched off in

the following situations:

▷ Depress the clutch or brake pedal.

▷ The low beams are switched on.

Starting the engine

General information

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas; otherwise, breathing of exhaust fumes

may lead to loss of consciousness and death.

The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,

an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀

Unattended vehicle

Do not leave the car unattended with the

engine running; otherwise, it presents a poten‐

tial source of danger.

Before leaving the car with the engine running,

shift to neutral or engage transmission posi‐

tion P and set the parking brake firmly; other‐

wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀

Frequent starting in quick succession

Avoid repeated futile attempts at starting

the car and avoid starting the car frequently in

quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not

burned or is inadequately burned, and there is

the danger of overheating and damaging the

catalytic converter.◀

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while

the vehicle remains stationary; start driving

right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Do not depress the accelerator when starting

the engine.

Starting the engine

Manual transmission

Remote control in the ignition lock or with

Comfort Access inside the vehicle, refer to

page 28.

Depress the brake pedal.

2. Depress the clutch pedal.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐

tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine

starts.

Steptronic transmission

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with

Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to

page 28.

Depress the brake pedal.

2. Move the selector lever to position P or N.

Seite 49

Driving

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐

tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine

starts.

Engine stop

General information

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐

ple, cannot operate the windows and injure

themselves.◀

Set the parking brake and further secure

the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐

erwise, the vehicle may roll. On steep upward

and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐

hicle, for example, by turning the steering

wheel in the direction of the curb.◀

Before driving into a car wash

To make it possible for the vehicle to roll in an

automatic car wash, follow the information on

Washing in automatic car washes, refer to

page 186.

Switching off the engine

Manual transmission

With the vehicle at a standstill, press the

Start/Stop button.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Set the parking brake firmly.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐

tion lock.

Steptronic transmission

1. Engage transmission position P with the ve‐

hicle stopped.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Set the parking brake firmly.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni‐

tion lock.

Parking brake

The concept

The parking brake is primarily intended to pre‐

vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it

brakes the rear wheels.

Also follow the instructions under Switching off

the engine, refer to page 50.

Setting

The lever engages automatically.

Releasing

Pull up slightly, press the button, and lower the

lever.

Notes

Using the parking brake while driving

If it should become necessary to use the

parking brake while driving, do not pull the

parking brake too forcefully. Keep the button

on the parking brake lever pressed at all times.

Seite 50

CONTROLS

Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Excessive application of the parking brake can

block the rear wheels and lead to fishtailing of

the vehicle.◀

The brake lights do not light up when the park‐

ing brake is pulled.

Turn signal, high-beams,

headlight flasher

1 Turn signal

2 Switching on the high-beams

3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight

flasher

Turn signal

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the

resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp

indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Signaling a turn briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold

it there for as long as you want the turn signal

to flash.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever to the resistance point.

The turn signal flashes three times.

This function can be activated or deactivated:

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

8. Press the button to select:

Seite 51

Driving

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷

Turn signal flashes once.

▷

Triple turn signal.

9. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Washer/wiper system

Notes

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen

Do not switch on the wipers if they are

frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the

wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor

may be damaged.◀

Do not use the wipers on a dry windshield

Do not use the wipers on a dry wind‐

shield; otherwise, the wiper blades may wear

more rapidly or become damaged.◀

At a glance

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or

the rain sensor

4 Cleaning the windshield and headlights

Switching on wipers

Press the wiper lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.

Normal wiper speed

Press up once.

The system switches to operation in the inter‐

mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed

Press up twice or press once beyond the resist‐

ance point.

The system switches to normal speed when the

vehicle is stationary.

Switching off wipers or brief wipe

Press the wiper lever down, arrow 2.

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.

▷ Brief wipe: press down once.

▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down

once.

▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor

If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the

intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the

time between wipes is controlled automatically

and depends on the intensity of the rainfall.

The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield,

directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing

through an automatic car wash; otherwise,

damage could be caused by undesired wiper

activation.◀

Seite 52

CONTROLS

Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Activating intermittent wipe or rain

sensor

Press the button, arrow 3.

The symbol is shown in the tachometer.

Setting the sensitivity of the rain sensor

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 49.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button to select the desired sensi‐

tivity.

7. Wait or hold the button until the display

changes.

The settings were stored.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain

sensor

Press the button again, arrow 3.

Cleaning the windshield and headlights

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐

shield and activates the wipers briefly.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched

on, the headlights are cleaned at regular and

appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washer system at freezing

temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger

that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐

erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this

reason, use antifreeze.

Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is

empty; otherwise, you could damage the

pump.◀

Seite 53

Driving

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Do not use the washing facilities when

the hood is open

Only use the washing facilities when the hood

is fully locked; otherwise, the headlamp washer

system may become damaged.◀

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are heated au‐

tomatically while the engine is running or the

ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

0 Resting position

1 Switching on intermittent wipe

Turn the cap to level 1.

When reverse gear is engaged, the system

switches to continuous operation.

2 Cleaning the rear window with intermittent

wipe

Turn the cap further to level 2 and hold.

3 Cleaning the rear window in the resting po‐

sition

Turn the cap to level 3 and hold.

The rear window wiper does not move if the

cap is in position 1 before the ignition is

switched on.

To switch on the rear window wiper:

Move the cap to its basic position.

2. Select the required position again.

Do not use the washing mechanisms

when the washer fluid reservoir is empty

Do not use washing mechanisms when the

washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you

will damage the washer pump.◀

Washer fluid

General information

Antifreeze for washer fluid

Antifreeze is flammable and can cause in‐

juries if used improperly.

Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐

tion.

Only keep it in the closed original container and

inaccessible to children.

Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐

tainer.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is

regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual

states; do not exceed the allowable washer

fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the

usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐

tainer. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concen‐

trate or the equivalent.◀

Washer fluid reservoir

Adding washer fluid

Only add washer fluid when the engine is

cool, and then close the cover completely to

avoid contact between the washer fluid and

hot engine parts.

Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk

to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀

Seite 54

CONTROLS

Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐

voir.

The recommended minimum filling quantity is

0.2 US gal/1 liter.

Fill with a mixture of window washing concen‐

trate and water; if needed, add antifreeze ac‐

cording to the manufacturer instructions.

Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain

the correct mixing ratio.

Do not fill in undiluted window washing con‐

centrate and do not fill in pure water; this could

damage the washer system.

Do not mix window washing concentrate from

different manufacturers; this could cause the

washer nozzles to clog.

Manual transmission

Pay attention to the shift plane

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push

the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inad‐

vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could

lead to engine damage.◀

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. When

the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight

resistance needs to be overcome.

Steptronic transmission

In addition to the fully automatic mode, gears

can also be shifted manually using Steptronic,

refer to page 56.

Parking the vehicle

Secure the vehicle

Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐

gine running, move the selector lever to posi‐

tion P and set the handbrake; otherwise, the

vehicle will begin moving.◀

Disengaging the remote control

To remove the remote control from the ignition

lock, first move the selector lever to position P

and switch off the engine: interlock. Remove

the remote control from the ignition lock, refer

to page 48.

Selector lever positions

P R N D M/S + –

Displays in the tachometer

The selector lever position is displayed and the

engaged gear, such as M4, is displayed in

manual mode.

Seite 55

Driving

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Changing selector lever positions

▷ With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved

out of position P.

▷ When the vehicle is stationary, step on the

brake before shifting out of P or N; other‐

wise, the selector lever is locked: shiftlock.

Press on the brake pedal until you

start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after

you select a driving position, maintain pres‐

sure on the brake pedal until you are ready

to start.◀

A lock prevents accidental shifting into selector

lever positions R and P.

To override the lock, press the button on the

front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The

front wheels are blocked.

R is Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral

For example, engage this position in a car

wash. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive

Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐

ward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel con‐

sumption is lowest when you are driving in po‐

sition D.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving

performance. Press on the accelerator beyond

the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the Sport program

Move the selector lever from position D toward

the left into the M/S shifting slot.

The Sport program is activated and DS is dis‐

played. This position is recommended for a per‐

formance-oriented driving style.

To deactivate the Sport program or manual

mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right

into position D.

Activating the M/S manual mode

Move the selector lever from position D toward

the left into the M/S shifting slot.

Push the selector lever forward or backward.

Manual mode becomes active and the gear is

changed.

The tachometer displays the engaged gear,

e. g. M1.

▷ To shift up: press the selector lever back‐

ward.

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐

ward.

Seite 56

CONTROLS

Driving

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐

ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not

shift down if the engine speed is too high. The

selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐

ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Shifting gears using the shift paddles

on the steering wheel

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow

you to shift gears quickly while keeping both

hands on the steering wheel.

▷ When the shift paddles on the steering

wheel are used to shift gears while in auto‐

matic mode, the transmission switches to

manual mode.

▷ If the shift paddles are not used to acceler‐

ate or shift gears for a certain amount of

time, the transmission switches back to au‐

tomatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane,

manual mode remains active.

▷ Pull one of the two shift paddles:

The transmission shifts up.

▷ Press one of the two shift paddles:

The transmission shifts down.

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropri‐

ate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not

shift down if the engine speed is too high. The

selected gear is briefly displayed in the instru‐

ment panel, followed by the current gear.

Manually unlocking the selector lever

lock

If the selector lever is locked in position P al‐

though the ignition is switched on, the brake is

depressed, and the button on the selector lever

is pressed, the selector lever lock can be over‐

ridden:

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever

until the sleeve is inside out.

Pull off the plug-in cable connector if nec‐

essary.

4. Insert the pulling hook 1 into the loop on

the passenger side.

The pulling hook is found in the vehicle

document portfolio or in the pouch of the

wheel change set, refer to page 178.

5. Pull the loop upward.

6. Move the selector lever into the desired po‐

sition, pressing the button on the front of

the selector lever.

Set the parking brake

Manually unlock the selector lever lock

for towing only. Before manually unlocking the

selector lever lock, pull the parking brake

firmly; otherwise, the vehicle may roll away and

cause personal injury or property damage.◀

Seite 57

Driving

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Displays

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Odometer, external tem‐

perature display, clock

At a glance

1 Current speed

2 Odometer, trip odometer, external temper‐

ature, time

3 Resetting the trip odometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever to

open information in display area 2.

The following information is displayed consecu‐

tively:

▷ Trip odometer

▷ Time

▷ External temperature

Trip odometer

Displaying the trip odometer

Press button 3 briefly.

Resetting the trip odometer

1. Press button 3 briefly.

The trip odometer is displayed.

2. Press button 3 again.

The trip odometer is reset.

Time

Set the time, refer to page 62.

External temperature, external

temperature warning

If the display drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal

sounds and a warning light lights up. There is

the increased danger of ice.

Ice on roads

Even at temperatures above

+37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on

roads.

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shady

roads, for example, to avoid the increased dan‐

ger of an accident.◀

Units of measure

To set the respective units of measure, miles or

km for the odometer and ℃ or ℉ for the exter‐

nal temperature, refer to page 61.

Seite 58

CONTROLS

Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Tachometer

It is imperative that you avoid engine speeds in

the red warning field. In this range, the fuel

supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature

A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and

therefore the engine, becomes too hot.

Check the coolant level, refer to page 168.

Fuel gauge

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the

fuel gauge indicates the side of the vehicle with

the fuel filler flap.

The vehicle inclination may cause the display to

vary.

Notes on refueling, refer to page 148.

Filling capacities, refer to page 209.

Range

After the reserve range is reached:

▷ The remaining LEDs change from orange to

red, arrow.

▷ The remaining range is shown on the tach‐

ometer.

▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such

as when corners are taken rapidly, engine

functions are not ensured.

A warning light lights up below a range of ap‐

prox. 30 miles/50 km.

Refuel promptly

At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function

is not ensured and damage may occur.◀

Computer

Opening information in the tachometer

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Overview of the information

The following information is displayed consecu‐

tively by repeatedly pressing the button on the

turn indicator lever:

▷ Range.

▷ Average fuel consumption.

▷ Current fuel consumption.

▷ Average speed.

To set the corresponding units of measure, re‐

fer to page 61.

Seite 59

Displays

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available

with the remaining fuel.

It is calculated based on your driving style over

the last 18 miles/30 km.

Average fuel consumption

This is calculated for the period during which

the engine is running.

To reset the average consumption: press the

button on the turn indicator lever for ap‐

prox. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel consumption. You can

check whether you are currently driving in an

efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle was parked and

the engine was switched off manually are not

included in the average speed calculations.

To reset the average speed: press the button

on the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 sec‐

onds.

Radio MINI Boost CD: displays on the

radio

Some computer functions can also be shown

on the radio display, refer to page 125.

Settings and information

Operating concept

Some settings and information can only be cre‐

ated or opened while the ignition is switched

on, the vehicle is standing, and the doors are

closed.

1 Button for:

▷ Selecting the display.

▷ Setting values.

▷ Confirming the selected display or set

values.

▷ Calling up computer information 59.

Symbol Function

Set the rain sensor, refer to

page 52.

Open Check-Control, refer to

page 64.

View service requirement dis‐

play, refer to page 63.

Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor,

refer to page 74.

Resetting the Tire Pressure

Monitor, refer to page 77.

Set the formats and units of

measure, reset to the factory

settings, refer to page 61.

Seite 60

CONTROLS

Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Symbol Function

Personal Profile settings, refer

to page 20.

Exit the menu.

Exiting displays

Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "HOME" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down.

The current speed is displayed again.

Displays are also exited if no entries are made

within approx. 8 seconds.

Next setting or information

Within a setting or information display,

press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "NEXT" is displayed.

2. Hold the button down.

Direct change to the next setting or piece of in‐

formation.

Formats and units of

measure

The formats and units of measure can be set.

The settings are stored for the remote control

in use.

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol shown is displayed, arrow.

▷ Fuel consumption: l/100 km, mpg,

km/l

Seite 61

Displays

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Distance: km, mi.

▷ Temperature: ℃, ℉

7. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

8. Press the button to change the format or

the unit of measure.

9. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

The settings are stored.

Resetting to factory settings

The settings for formats and units of measure

can be reset to the factory settings. The settings

are stored for the remote control in use.

Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

4. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

5. Press the button repeatedly until "RESET"

appears on the display.

6. Press and hold the button until the display

changes to the first setting option.

The settings are reset.

Clock

Setting the time

Radio MINI Boost CD: set the time, refer to

page 124.

Date

Setting the date

Radio MINI Boost CD: set the date, refer to

page 124.

Seite 62

CONTROLS

Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date of

the next scheduled service are displayed briefly

immediately after you start the engine or

switch on the ignition.

The current service requirements can be read

out from the remote control by the service spe‐

cialist.

Displaying the vehicle check

For certain maintenance operations, you can

view the distance remaining or the due date for

that operation in the tachometer.

Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐

sponding symbol and "SERVICE-INFO" are

displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button to display the individual

service requirement items.

Possible displays

1 Button for selecting the information.

Symbol Function

Service requirements

Engine oil

Seite 63

Displays

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Symbol Function

Roadworthiness test

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

Exit the display, refer to

page 61

Next setting or information, re‐

fer to page 61

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control monitors vehicle functions

and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys‐

tems being monitored.

A Check Control message consists of indicator

and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors in display

area 1 or 2.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper

functioning and light up temporarily when the

engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

The symbol indicates that Check Control

messages have been stored. The Check Control

messages can be displayed later.

What to do in case of a malfunction

The meaning of each lamp in the event of a

malfunction and tips on how to respond are

provided in the list, refer to page 191.

Seite 64

CONTROLS

Displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button on the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed

continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐

function is eliminated. If several malfunctions

occur at once, the messages are displayed con‐

secutively.

Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐

tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. However,

they are stored and can be displayed again

later.

Viewing stored Check Control messages

The stored Check Control messages can only be

displayed while the driver's door is closed.

Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

2. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

3. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐

sponding symbol and "CHECK INFO" ap‐

pear on the display.

4. Press and hold the button.

If there is no Check Control message, this is

indicated by "CHECK OK".

If a Check Control message has been

stored, the corresponding message is dis‐

played.

5. Press the button to check for other mes‐

sages.

Seite 65

Displays

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Lamps

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

At a glance

0 Lamps off / daytime running lights

1 Parking lights and daytime running lights

2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights

3 Automatic headlight control, Adaptive Light

Control, daytime running lights, and wel‐

come lights

Parking lights/low

beams, headlight con‐

trol

General information

When the driver's door is opened with the igni‐

tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto‐

matically switched off when the light switch is

in position 0, 2, or 3.

Switch on the parking lights if necessary, switch

position 1.

Parking lights

Switch position 1: the vehicle lights light up on

all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐

ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐

charged and it would then be impossible to

start the engine.

When parking, it is preferable to switch on the

one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to

page 67.

Low beams

Switch position 2: the low beams are lit when

the ignition is switched on.

Automatic headlight control

Switch position 3: the low beams are switched

on and off automatically depending on the am‐

bient light, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight, or if

there is precipitation. Adaptive Light Control is

active.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can

cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams remain switched on independ‐

ent of the ambient lighting conditions when

you switch on the front fog lights.

Personal responsibility

The automatic headlamp control cannot

serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐

ment in determining when the lamps should be

switched on in response to ambient lighting

conditions.

Seite 66

CONTROLS

Lamps

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

For example, the sensors are unable to detect

fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you

should always switch on the lamps manually

under these conditions.◀

The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐

ter the vehicle is switched off.

High-beams/roadside parking lights

1 Turn signal/roadside parking light

2 Switching on the high-beams

3 Switching off the high-beams/headlight

flasher

To assist in parking, the vehicle can be illumi‐

nated on one side; note the country-specific

regulations.

The roadside parking lights drain the battery.

Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly

long periods of time; otherwise, the battery

might not have enough power to start the en‐

gine.

Switching on the roadside parking light

To switch on the roadside parking light on the

left or right, press the turn indicator lever up or

down after switching off the vehicle, arrow 1.

Switching off the roadside parking light

Press the lever up or down to the resistance

point.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights light up in switch

position 0, 1, or 3 when the ignition is switched

on.

The exterior lighting goes out automatically af‐

ter the vehicle is switched off.

In switch position 1, the parking lights light up

after the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, driving with daytime run‐

ning lights is mandatory; for this reason, day‐

time running lights cannot be deactivated in

these cases.

Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

Seite 67

Lamps

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

8. Press the button to select:

▷

Daytime running lights are activated.

▷

Daytime running lights are deactivated.

9. Hold the button down.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Welcome lights

If the light switch stays in switch position 2 or 3

after the vehicle is switched off, the parking

lights and the interior lights light up for a cer‐

tain period when the vehicle is unlocked.

Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while after

the ignition is switched off, if the lights are

switched off and the headlight flasher is

switched on.

Setting the duration

Switch on the ignition.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol and "SET" are displayed.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol shown is displayed, arrow.

7. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

8. Press the button to select:

▷

The function is deactivated.

▷ ...

Select the duration, e.g. 40 seconds.

9. Hold the button down.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Adaptive Light Control

The concept

Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight

control system that enables dynamic illumina‐

tion of the road surface.

Seite 68

CONTROLS

Lamps

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐

rameters, the light from the headlight follows

the course of the road.

Activating

With the ignition switch on, turn the light switch

to position 3, refer to page 66.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐

tive Light Control does not swivel to the driver's

side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

When driving in reverse, Adaptive Light Control

is not active.

Malfunction

The warning light lights up. Adaptive

Light Control is malfunctioning or has

failed. Have the system checked as

soon as possible.

More information, refer to page 191.

Fog lights

At a glance

To switch on the front fog lights: press the

switch.

To switch off, press the respective switch up‐

ward or downward again.

Fog lights

The parking lights or low beams must be

switched on. The green indicator lamp lights up

when the front fog lights are switched on.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front

fog lights are switched off when the headlight

flasher or the high-beams are activated.

If the automatic headlight control is activated,

refer to page 66, the low beams are switched

on automatically when the front fog lights are

switched on.

Instrument lighting

The parking lights or low beams must be

switched on to adjust the brightness. The

brightness is increased to a certain limit and is

then reduced again.

▷ Press the button briefly: the brightness

changes in stages.

▷ Press and hold the button: the brightness

changes continuously.

Interior lights

The interior lights, the footwell lights and the

cargo area light are controlled automatically.

To avoid draining the battery, all lights inside

the vehicle are switched off some time after the

ignition is switched off.

Seite 69

Lamps

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Switching interior lights on/off

manually

To switch the interior lights on/off: press the

switch.

If the interior lights are to remain switched off,

press the switch for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lights

Reading lights are located in the front next to

the interior light and in the rear.

Switching the reading lights on/off

Front: press the switch.

Rear: press the button.

Ambient lighting

The color and brightness of the ambient light‐

ing can be changed.

Press the switch forward: the color changes in

steps.

Press the switch back: the brightness changes

in steps.

Intermediate settings and intermediate colors

are possible.

For continuously changing colors of the ambi‐

ent lighting, press the switch forward for more

than 10 seconds.

For Canadian vehicles:

Continuously changing colors of the ambient

lighting is not available.

Seite 70

CONTROLS

Lamps

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Safety

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Airbags

The graphic shows the MINI Paceman as an ex‐

ample.

1 Front airbags

2 Knee airbag

3 Side airbag

4 Head airbags

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front

passenger by responding to frontal impacts in

which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐

quate restraint.

Side airbags

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the

side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags

In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports

the head.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal

impact.

Seite 71

Safety

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Protective action

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐

tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end

collisions.

Information on how to ensure the opti‐

mal protective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.

▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the

steering wheel rim, holding your hands at

the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to

keep the danger of injury to your hands or

arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐

gered.

▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐

jects between an airbag and a person.

▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on

the front passenger side as a storage area.

▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the

front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover

with adhesive labels or coverings, and do

not attach holders or cables such as for

navigation instruments and mobile phones.

▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting

correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs

in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can

occur if the front airbag is triggered.

▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or

other objects on the front passenger seat

that are not approved specifically for seats

with integrated side airbags.

▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as

jackets, over the backrests.

▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads

away from the side airbag and do not rest

against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries

can occur if the airbags are triggered.

▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system.

▷ Do not remove the steering wheel.

▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

bag cover panels, cover them or modify

them in any way.

▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐

nents or the wiring in the airbag system.

This also applies to steering wheel covers,

the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars

and the sides of the headliner.◀

Even when all instructions are followed closely,

injury from contact with the airbags cannot be

ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to

short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐

ing impairment in sensitive individuals.

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation

and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components imme‐

diately after the system has been triggered;

otherwise, there is the danger of burns.

Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐

mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by

your service center or a workshop that has the

necessary authorization for handling explo‐

sives.

Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐

tem could lead to failure in an emergency or

undesired triggering of the airbag, either of

which could result in injury.◀

Warning notices and information about the air‐

bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front

passenger airbags

The system determines whether the front pas‐

senger seat is occupied by measuring the elec‐

trical resistance of the human body.

The front, side, and knee airbags on the front

passenger side are activated or deactivated ac‐

cordingly by the system.

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview

mirror, refer to page 73, shows the current

status of the front passenger airbags, deacti‐

vated or activated.

Seite 72

CONTROLS

Safety

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Leave feet in the footwell

Make sure that the front passenger keeps

his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the

front passenger airbags may not function prop‐

erly.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the front

passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passen‐

ger seat, read the safety and operating instruc‐

tions under Transporting children safely, refer

to page 43.◀

Malfunction of the automatic

deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults,

the front passenger airbags may be deactivated

in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐

cator lamp for the front passenger airbags

lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that

the front passenger airbags are activated and

the indicator lamp goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have

the person sit in the rear.

To make sure that occupation of the seat cush‐

ion can be detected correctly:

▷ Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion

padding, ball mats, or other items to the

front passenger seat unless they are specifi‐

cally recommended by the manufacturer of

your MINI.

▷ Do not place electronic devices on the pas‐

senger seat if a child restraint fixing system

is mounted on the seat.

▷ Do not place objects under the seat that

could press against the seat from below.

Indicator light for the front passenger

airbags

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐

bags indicates the operating state of the front

passenger airbags.

The light indicates whether the airbags are acti‐

vated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights up

when a child who is properly

seated in a child restraint fix‐

ing system intended for that

purpose is detected on the

seat or the seat is empty. The

airbags on the front passen‐

ger side are not activated.

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,

for example, a correctly seated person of

sufficient size is detected on the seat. The

airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐

tivated.

Most child seats are detected by the system.

Especially the child seats required by NHTSA at

the time that the vehicle was manufactured.

After installing a child seat, make sure that the

indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

lights up. This indicates that the child seat has

been detected and the front passenger airbags

are not activated.

Seite 73

Safety

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Operational readiness of airbag system

In the radio ready state and beyond, re‐

fer to page 48, the warning light lights

up briefly to indicate that the entire air‐

bag system and the belt tensioners are opera‐

tional.

Airbag system malfunction

▷ Warning light does not light up in the radio

ready state.

▷ Warning light remains permanently on.

Have the airbag system checked without

delay if there is a malfunction

In the event of a malfunction in the airbag sys‐

tem, have it checked without delay; otherwise,

there is the risk that the system will not func‐

tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe ac‐

cident occurs.◀

FTM Flat Tire Monitor

The concept

The system does not measure the actual infla‐

tion pressure in the tires.

The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by

comparing the rotational speeds of the individ‐

ual wheels while moving.

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter

and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐

sponding wheel change. This is detected and

reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements

The system must have been initialized when

the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐

wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐

sured.

Initialize the system after each correction of the

tire inflation pressure and after every tire or

wheel change.

System limits

Sudden tire damage

Sudden serious tire damage caused by

external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐

vance.◀

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires

cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire

inflation pressure regularly.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in

the following situations:

▷ When the system has not been initialized.

▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road

surface.

▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,

high lateral acceleration.

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Initialization

The initialization process adopts the set infla‐

tion tire pressures as reference values for the

detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by

confirming the inflation pressures.

Seite 74

CONTROLS

Safety

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Do not initialize the system when driving with

snow chains.

1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the corre‐

sponding symbol and "RESET" are dis‐

played.

5. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

6. Drive away.

Initialization is completed while the car is

traveling without feedback being given.

Indication of a flat tire

The warning lights come on in yellow

and red. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation

pressure.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 160, are la‐

beled with a circular symbol containing the

letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

Do not continue driving without run-flat

tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not

equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving

may result in serious accidents.◀

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐

bility Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the inflation pressure in

all four tires.

The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 161, can be used for this

purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is

correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have

been initialized. In this case, initialize the

system.

If an identification is not possible, please

contact the service center.

Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 161.

Run-flat tires

You can continue driving with a damaged tire

at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Seite 75

Safety

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation

pressure in all four tires.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is

correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have

been initialized. In this case, initialize the

system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of

tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire

inflation pressure depends on the cargo load

and the driving style and conditions.

For a vehicle containing an average load, the

possible driving distance is ap‐

prox. 50 miles/80 km.

When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,

its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐

duced lane stability during braking, a longer

braking distance, and altered self-steering

properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐

ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐

ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance depends

on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the

actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐

pending on the driving speed, road conditions,

external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire

Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a

change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐

duced lane stability during braking, a longer

braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐

erties.◀

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce

speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire

could come loose and cause an accident. Do

not continue driving, and contact your service

center.◀

Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM

The concept

The system monitors the tire pressure in the

four mounted tires. The system notifies you if

there is a significant loss of pressure in one or

more tires. Sensors in the tire valves measure

the tire pressure.

Notes

Tire damage caused by external influen‐

ces

Sudden tire damage caused by external influ‐

ences cannot be indicated in advance.◀

To operate the system, also note the additional

information and instructions contained under

Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 152.

Functional requirements

The system must have been reset while the in‐

flation pressure was correct; otherwise, it may

not reliably signal a loss in pressure.

Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire

inflation pressure to a new value and after

changing a tire or wheel

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐

sure that the system will operate properly.

Seite 76

CONTROLS

Safety

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Performing a reset

Perform a system reset after adjusting the tire

inflation pressure to a new value and after

changing a tire or wheel.

1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever

repeatedly until "SET/INFO" is displayed.

3. Press and hold the button until the display

changes.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the sym‐

bol for the Tire Pressure Monitor and "AC‐

TIVE" are displayed. The Tire Pressure Mon‐

itor can be reset with "RESET".

5. Press and hold the button until "RESET‐

TING" is displayed.

6. Drive away.

After a short trip at over 20 mph/30 km/h,

the set tire inflation pressures are adopted

as target values. The reset is completed au‐

tomatically as you drive.

The trip can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the reset is contin‐

ued automatically.

Low tire pressure message

The warning lights come on in yellow

and red. A Check Control message is

displayed. In addition, a signal sounds.

▷ There is a flat tire or substantial loss of infla‐

tion pressure on the indicated wheel.

▷ The system was not reset after a wheel

change and thus issues warnings based on

the inflation pressures initialized last.

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.

Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with

regular tires or run-flat tires.

Run-flat tires, refer to page 160, are la‐

beled on the tire sidewall with a circular

symbol containing the letters RSC.

Seite 77

Safety

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Do not continue driving without run-flat

tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not

equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving

may result in serious accidents.◀

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC

Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if nec‐

essary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all

four tires. The tire pressure gauge of the

Mobility System, refer to page 161, can be

used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is

correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not

have been reset. Reset the system.

If an identification is not possible, please

contact the service center.

2. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility Sys‐

tem, refer to page 161.

Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐

tem, may damage the TPM wheel electron‐

ics. In this case, have the electronics

checked at the next opportunity and have

them replaced if necessary.

Run-flat tires

You can continue driving with a damaged tire

at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving without run-flat

tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not

equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving

may result in serious accidents.◀

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

vers.

2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the

next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is

correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not

have been reset. Reset the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of

tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire

inflation pressure depends on the cargo load

and the driving style and conditions.

For a vehicle containing an average load, the

possible driving distance is ap‐

prox. 50 miles/80 km.

When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire,

its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐

duced lane stability during braking, a longer

braking distance, and altered self-steering

properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐

ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐

ing over obstacles, e. g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance depends

on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the

actual distance may be smaller or greater de‐

pending on the driving speed, road conditions,

external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire

Drive moderately and do not exceed a

speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a

change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐

duced lane stability during braking, a longer

braking distance and altered self-steering prop‐

erties.◀

Seite 78

CONTROLS

Safety

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving

can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce

speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire

could come loose and cause an accident. Do

not continue driving, and contact your service

center.◀

Message indicating that the inflation

pressure needs to be checked

The yellow warning light lights up.

A Check Control message is displayed.

▷ The system has detected that a wheel was

changed but a reset was not performed.

▷ The tire was not inflated according to speci‐

fications.

▷ The tire pressure has dropped since the last

confirmation.

In this case:

▷ Check the tire inflation pressure and correct

it if necessary.

▷ After changing a wheel, reset the system.

System limits

The system will not function properly if a reset

was not performed, e.g., it may identify a tire as

flat although the tire is filled to the correct infla‐

tion pressure.

The tire pressure depends on the temperature

of the tire. An increase in the tire temperature,

e.g., while driving or due to sunlight, increases

the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure de‐

creases when the tire temperature drops. In

case of severe temperature drops, this behavior

may lead to a warning on account of the de‐

fined warning limits.

Malfunction

The yellow warning light flashes yellow

and then lights up continuously.

A Check Control message is displayed.

A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot

be detected.

Display in the following situations:

▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted, e.g., a compact wheel:

Have the system checked by the service

center if necessary.

▷ Malfunction:

Have the system checked by the service

center.

▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.

Reset the system again.

The yellow warning light flashes and

then lights up continuously.

A Check Control message is displayed.

A flat tire or tire inflation pressure loss cannot

be detected.

Display in the following situation:

▷ Disturbance by other systems or devices

with the same radio frequency:

After leaving the area of the disturbance,

the system automatically becomes active

again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS

138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems

Each tire, including the spare (if provided)

should be checked monthly when cold and in‐

flated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.).

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐

sure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

Seite 79

Safety

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated

tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐

ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects

a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐

mately one minute and then remain continu‐

ously illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐

tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐

riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐

placement or alternate tires or wheels on the

vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐

placement or alternate tires and wheels allow

the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Seite 80

CONTROLS

Safety

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Antilock Brake System

ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during

braking.

Steerability is maintained even during full brak‐

ing. This increases active driving safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the en‐

gine.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV

The system controls the brake pressure in the

rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

CBC Cornering Brake Control

When braking in curves or during a lane

change, driving stability and steering response

are improved further.

Brake assistant

When the brakes are applied rapidly, this sys‐

tem automatically produces the maximum

braking force boost. In this way, the system

helps keep the braking distance as short as

possible. This system utilizes all of the benefits

provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal

for the duration of full braking.

Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol DSC

The concept

DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels

when driving away and accelerating.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐

tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject

to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle

on a steady course by reducing engine speed

and by applying brakes to the individual

wheels.

DSC is operational every time you start the en‐

gine.

Adjust your driving style to the situation

An appropriate driving style is always the

responsibility of the driver.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even

with DSC.

Do not reduce the additional safety margin

with a risky driving style, as otherwise there is a

risk of an accident.◀

Seite 81

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Deactivating DSC

Press the switch until the DSC OFF indicator

lamp lights up in the speedometer and DSC OFF

appears in the tachometer. DSC is deactivated.

Intervening measures to stabilize the vehicle

and give it forward momentum are no longer

executed.

When driving with snow chains or to rock the

vehicle free of snow, it may be useful to deacti‐

vate DSC temporarily.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again

as soon as possible.

Activating DSC

Press the switch again; the DSC indicator lamps

in the display elements go out.

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator lamp in the tachometer

flashes: DSC is controlling the drive

forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has

failed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometer

lights up and DSC OFF appears in the

tachometer.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol DTC

The concept

The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which

forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum forward mo‐

mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐

lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐

ited.

It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐

ate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC

under the following special circumstances:

▷ When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in

slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road

surfaces

▷ When rocking a vehicle free or starting off

in deep snow, sand, or on loose ground

▷ When driving with snow chains.

Seite 82

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Activating DTC

Press the switch; the DSC OFF indicator lamp

lights up in the speedometer and TRACTION

appears in the tachometer. Dynamic Stability

Control DSC is deactivated, Dynamic Traction

Control DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC

Press the switch again; the DSC OFF indicator

lamp in the speedometer and TRACTION in the

tachometer go out.

In the interest of better forward momentum,

brake intervention is performed in the manner

of a differential lock when the drive wheels spin

unevenly even when DSC/DTC is deactivated.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator lamp in the tachometer

flashes: DTC is controlling the drive

forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC and DTC has

failed.

The indicator lamp in the speedometer

lights up and TRACTION appears in the

tachometer.

DTC is activated.

Hill drive-off assistant

This system supports driving away on gradients.

The parking brake is not required.

Hold the vehicle in place with the foot

brake.

2. Release the foot brake and drive away

without delay.

Driving off without delay

After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐

ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant

will not hold the vehicle in place for more than

approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin

rolling back.◀

ALL4 all-wheel system

ALL4 is the all-wheel system of your MINI. The

combined effects of ALL4 and DSC further opti‐

mize the traction and dynamic driving charac‐

teristics. The ALL4 all-wheel system variably

distributes the drive forces to the front and rear

axles depending on the driving situation and

prevailing road conditions.

Sport button

When this button is pressed, the vehicle re‐

sponds in an even sportier manner.

Seite 83

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ The engine responds more spontaneously

to accelerator movements.

▷ The steering responds more directly.

▷ Cooper S, John Cooper Works: the engine

sounds sportier when coasting.

▷ For Steptronic transmissions: more rapid

gear changes in the Sport program.

Activating the system

Press the switch; the LED in the button lights up

and SPORT is displayed briefly in the tachome‐

ter.

Deactivating the system

▷ Press the switch again.

▷ Switch the engine off.

Seite 84

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Driving comfort

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Cruise control

The concept

The system is functional at speeds beginning at

approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

The vehicle stores and maintains the speed

specified using the controls on the steering

wheel.

Do not use cruise control

Do not use the system if unfavorable con‐

ditions make it impossible to drive at a constant

speed, for instance:

▷ On curvy roads.

▷ In heavy traffic.

▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or

on a loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle

and cause an accident.◀

Controls

At a glance

1 Maintaining, storing, and increasing the

speed

2 Activating/deactivating cruise control

3 Maintaining, storing, and reducing the

speed

4 Resuming cruise control

Switching on

Press button 2.

The indicator lamp lights up in the

speedometer. Cruise control is ready to

operate and can be activated.

Switching off

Press button 2.

▷ When activated: press twice.

▷ When interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored target speed is

cleared.

Interrupting

Press button 2.

The system is interrupted automatically if

▷ The brakes are applied.

▷ The clutch pedal is depressed.

Seite 85

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ The transmission position D is disengaged.

▷ DSC intervenes.

Maintaining, storing the current speed

Press button 1 or button 3.

The current speed is maintained and stored. It

is displayed briefly in the tachometer.

On downhill gradients, it may prove impossible

to maintain the set speed if the engine braking

power is insufficient. On uphill gradients, it may

prove impossible to maintain the set speed if

the engine power output is insufficient.

Increasing speed

▷ Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired

speed is reached.

Each time the button is pressed, the speed

increases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▷ Press and hold button 1 until the desired

speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on

the accelerator pedal. After the button is

released, the achieved speed is maintained

and stored.

Decreasing speed

Press button 3 repeatedly or hold it until the

desired speed is reached.

The functions are the same those when the

speed is increased, only that the speed is re‐

duced.

Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Press button 4.

The last stored speed is resumed and main‐

tained.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is

switched off.

Display in the tachometer

The selected speed is displayed briefly.

If the display --- mph or --- km/h appears

briefly, conditions may not be adequate to op‐

erate the system.

For better control

The indicator lamp lights up in the

speedometer. Cruise control is ready to

operate and can be activated.

Malfunction

The warning lamp in the tachometer

lights up.

The system is malfunctioning or has

failed.

Park Distance Control

PDC

The concept

PDC provides support when parking in reverse.

Signal tones indicate that the vehicle is ap‐

proaching an object behind it. Measurements

are made by four ultrasound sensors in the

bumpers.

The range of these sensors is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given:

▷ By the two corner sensors at ap‐

prox. 24 in/60 cm.

Seite 86

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m.

Avoid driving quickly with PDC

PDC is a parking aid that can display ob‐

jects when the vehicle approaches them slowly,

as is the case during parking maneuvers. Avoid

driving toward an object quickly as the system

may then be too late in issuing a warning for

technical reasons.◀

Automatic operation

The system is activated after approx. one sec‐

ond when reverse gear or selector lever posi‐

tion R is engaged while the engine is running or

the ignition is switched on. Await this short pe‐

riod before setting the vehicle into motion.

Signal tones

The closer the vehicle is to the object, the

shorter the intervals become. If the distance to

a detected object is less than approx.

12 in/30 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

If the distance remains constant, for example

when driving parallel to a wall, the signal tone

is stopped after approx. 3 seconds.

Volume

The signal tone volume can be adjusted.

Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 124.

System limits

Check the traffic situation as well

PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the

driver's personal judgment of the traffic situa‐

tion. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐

hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐

dent could result from road users or objects

located outside of the PDC detection range.

Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle

may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal

tone.◀

Malfunction

The warning light lights up. PDC is mal‐

functioning or has failed. Have the sys‐

tem checked.

To ensure full functionality of the sensors, keep

the sensors clean and free of ice. When using

high-pressure washers, do not spray the sen‐

sors for long periods and maintain a distance of

at least 12 in/30 cm.

Seite 87

Driving comfort

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Climate

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Air conditioner

1 Air volume

2 Cooling function

3 Recirculated air mode

4 Temperature

5 Rear window defroster

6 Vent settings

7 Windshield heating

Notes

Sufficient ventilation

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐

nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐

lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the

interior continuously worsens.◀

Seite 88

CONTROLS

Climate

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Air volume

Vary the air volume. The higher

the rate, the more effective the

heating or cooling will be.

The air flow rate may be reduced

or the blower may be switched

off entirely to save on battery power.

Switching the system on/off

Turn the rotary switch for the air volume to 0.

The blower and air conditioner are completely

switched off and the air supply is cut off.

Set any air volume to switch on the air condi‐

tioning.

Cooling function

The passenger compartment can

only be cooled with the engine

running.

The cooling function cools and

dehumidifies the incoming air

before reheating it as required, according to

the temperature setting.

The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐

sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may

fog up briefly when the engine is started.

To cool the air faster and more intensively

when external temperatures are high, switch

on the recirculated air mode.

Recirculated air mode

If the air outside the car has an

unpleasant odor or contains pol‐

lutants, shut off the supply to the

interior of the car temporarily.

The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-

air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off

the recirculated-air mode and increase the air

volume if necessary. Make sure that air can

flow onto the windshield.

Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐

vated at low external temperatures.

Temperature

Turn upward, red, to raise the

temperature.

Turn downward, blue, to lower

the temperature.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster

switches off automatically after a

certain period of time.

The rear window defroster

power may be lowered or even

switched off entirely to save on battery power.

Vent settings

Direct the flow of air to the win‐

dows , to the upper body

area , or to the footwell .

Intermediate positions are possi‐

ble.

Windshield heating

The windshield heating switches

off automatically after some

time.

The windshield heating may be

reduced or even switched off en‐

tirely to save on battery power.

Defrosting and defogging windows

Set the maximum air volume.

2. Air distribution in position .

By switching on the cooling function, the

windows are defogged more rapidly.

3. Set the highest temperature, red.

Seite 89

Climate

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

4. Deactivate recirculated air mode.

5. Switch on the windshield heating if neces‐

sary.

6. Switch on the rear window defroster if nec‐

essary.

Microfilter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The mi‐

crofilter is changed by the service center during

routine maintenance work.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐

vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐

tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the

outside air. The service center replaces this

combined filter during routine maintenance.

Automatic climate control

1 Air volume, manual

2 AUTO program

3 Recirculated air mode

4 Maximum cooling

5 Manual air distribution

6 Temperature

7 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐

sation

8 Cooling function

9 Rear window defroster

10 Windshield heating

Seite 90

CONTROLS

Climate

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Notes

Sufficient ventilation

When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐

tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐

nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recircu‐

lated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in the

interior continuously worsens.◀

Comfortable interior climate

The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis‐

tribution and air volume for virtually all condi‐

tions, refer to AUTO program below. Select a

comfortable interior temperature only.

The following sections contain more detailed

information on the available setting options.

Most of these settings are stored for the remote

control in use, Personal Profile settings, refer to

page 21.

Air volume, manual

Press the – button to reduce the

air volume. Press the + button to

increase the air volume.

The automatic mode for the air

volume can be switched on

again using the AUTO button.

The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower

may be switched off entirely to save on battery

power. The display remains the same.

Switching the system on/off

Reduce the air volume by pressing the – button

until the system is switched off. All displays go

out.

Press the AUTO button to switch the automatic

climate control back on.

AUTO program

The AUTO program automati‐

cally adjusts the air distribution

to the windshield and side win‐

dows, toward the upper body

area, and into the footwell. The

air volume and your specifications for the tem‐

perature are adjusted to outside influences due

to the seasons, e. g., solar radiation.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐

cally with the AUTO program.

The program is switched off if the air distribu‐

tion is manually adjusted or the button is

pressed again.

Recirculated air mode

If the air outside the car has an

unpleasant odor or contains pol‐

lutants, shut off the supply to the

interior of the car temporarily.

The system then recirculates the

air currently within the vehicle.

Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-

air mode, press the AUTO button or switch off

the recirculated-air mode and increase the air

volume if necessary. Make sure that air can

flow onto the windshield.

Recirculated air mode is automatically deacti‐

vated at low external temperatures.

Maximum cooling

Automatic climate control

switches to the lowest tempera‐

ture, a high air volume, and re‐

circulated air mode.

For maximum cooling, open the

vents for the upper body area.

The air is cooled as quickly as possible:

▷ At an external temperature above

32 ℉/0 ℃.

▷ When the engine is running.

Seite 91

Climate

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Manual air distribution

The flow of air is directed, as se‐

lected, to the windows, to the

upper body area, or to the foot‐

well.

The automatic mode for the air

distribution can be switched back on using the

AUTO button.

Temperature

Set the desired temperature in‐

dividually.

The automatic climate control

achieves this temperature as

quickly as possible regardless of

the season, using maximum cooling or heating

power if necessary, and then maintains it.

When switching between different temperature

settings in rapid succession, the automatic cli‐

mate control does not have sufficient time to

adjust the set temperature.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster

switches off automatically after a

certain period of time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper

wires are used as an antenna and are not part

of the rear window defroster.

Defrosting and defogging windows

Quickly removes ice and con‐

densation from the windshield

and front side windows. For this

purpose, also switch on the cool‐

ing function.

The windshield heating switches on automati‐

cally.

Windshield heating

The windshield heating switches

off automatically after some

time.

Cooling function

The cooling function cools and

dehumidifies the incoming air

before reheating it as required,

according to the temperature

setting. The passenger compart‐

ment can only be cooled with the engine run‐

ning.

The cooling function helps to prevent conden‐

sation on the windows or to remove it quickly.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may

fog up briefly when the engine is started. Recir‐

culated air mode is switched on automatically if

necessary.

The cooling function is switched on automati‐

cally when the AUTO button is pressed.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen. The acti‐

vated-charcoal filter provides additional protec‐

tion by filtering gaseous pollutants from the

outside air. The service center replaces this

combined filter during routine maintenance.

Seite 92

CONTROLS

Climate

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Ventilation

1 Knob for continuous opening and closing

2 Nozzle for direction of air flow

Opening/closing

Turn the knob.

Direction of air flow

Pivot the entire nozzle.

Seite 93

Climate

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Interior equipment

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Universal garage door

opener

The concept

The universal garage door opener can be used

to operate up to 3 functions in remote-control‐

led systems, such as garage door drives or

lighting systems. The universal garage door

opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held

transmitters. To operate it, the buttons on the

interior rearview mirror must be programmed

for the desired functions. The hand-held trans‐

mitter for the system is needed for the pro‐

gramming procedure.

During programming

During programming and before activat‐

ing a device using the Universal Garage Door

Opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐

mals, or objects in the range of movement of

the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there

is a risk of injury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-

held transmitter.◀

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored

functions for security reasons.

Compatibility

If this symbol is printed on the packag‐

ing or in the operating instructions of

the system being operated, the system

is generally compatible with the universal ga‐

rage door opener.

If you have any questions, please contact:

▷ Your service center.

▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of the

Gentex Corporation.

Controls on the interior rearview mirror

1 LED

2 Buttons

3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro‐

gramming.

Programming

General information

Switch on the ignition.

2. Initial setup:

Press the right and left buttons on the inte‐

rior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐

prox. 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐

rior rearview mirror begins to flash. All

programmed settings of the buttons on the

interior rearview mirror are deleted.

Seite 94

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys‐

tem to be operated a distance of approx. 1

to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons

on the interior rearview mirror. The re‐

quired distance depends on the particular

hand-held transmitter.

4. Press the button of the desired function on

the hand-held transmitter and the button

being programmed on the interior rearview

mirror simultaneously and hold. The LED on

the interior rearview mirror flashes slowly at

first.

5. When the LED flashes more rapidly, release

both buttons. Rapid flashing indicates that

the button on the interior rearview mirror

has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash faster after 60 sec‐

onds, change the distance between the in‐

terior rearview mirror and the hand-held

transmitter and repeat the step. Multiple

trials at different distances may be neces‐

sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between tri‐

als.

6. To program additional functions on other

buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be operated with the buttons

on the interior rearview mirror.

Special characteristics of alternating-

code radio systems

If the system cannot be operated after re‐

peated programming, check whether the sys‐

tem to be operated uses an alternating-code

system.

Read the operating instructions of the system

or press and hold the programmed button on

the interior rearview mirror. If the LED on the

interior rearview mirror flashes rapidly at first

and then lights up continuously for 2 seconds,

the system is equipped with an alternating-

code system. This flashing LED pattern repeats

itself for approx. 20 seconds.

In systems with an alternating-code system, the

universal garage door opener and the system

must be additionally synchronized.

Please obtain additional information on syn‐

chronization in the operating instructions of the

system being set up.

The systems will be easier to synchronize with

the aid of a second person.

Synchronization:

1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐

mote-controlled system.

2. Program the corresponding button on the

interior rearview mirror as described.

3. Identify and press the synchronization but‐

ton on the system being set up. You have

approx. 30 seconds for the next step.

4. Press and hold the button on the interior

rearview mirror for approx. 3 seconds and

then release it. Repeat this step up to three

times if necessary to complete the synchro‐

nization procedure. When synchronization

is completed, the programmed function is

executed.

Reprogramming individual buttons

Switch on the ignition.

2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis‐

tance of approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm from

the memory buttons.

The required distance depends on the par‐

ticular hand-held transmitter.

3. Press the memory button of the universal

garage door opener.

4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.

20 seconds, press the transmit button on

the hand-held transmitter.

5. Release both buttons when the LED flashes

rapidly.

If the LED does not flash rapidly after ap‐

prox. 60 seconds, change the distance and

repeat the step.

Seite 95

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly af‐

ter approx. 60 seconds, change the dis‐

tance and repeat the step. If programming

was aborted by the hand-held transmitter,

hold down the memory button and press

and release the button on the hand-held

transmitter several times for 2 seconds.

Controls

Prior to operation

Before operating a unit with the Universal

Garage Door Opener, ensure that there are no

people, animals, or objects in the range of

movement of the system; otherwise, there is a

risk of injury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-

held transmitter.◀

The system, such as the garage door, can be

operated using the button on the interior rear‐

view mirror with the engine running or the igni‐

tion switched on. When you are within the re‐

ception range of the system, press and hold the

button until the function is initiated. The LED on

the interior rearview mirror lights up continu‐

ously while the radio signal is being transmit‐

ted.

Deleting stored functions

Press the right and left buttons on the interior

rearview mirror simultaneously for approx.

20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All

stored functions are deleted. The functions can‐

not be deleted individually.

Sun visor

Glare protection

Folding down

Fold the sun visor down.

Folding up

Fold the sun visor up.

Glare protection from the side

Folding down

1. Fold the sun visor down.

2. Detach from the holder and pivot sideways

to the side window.

Folding up

To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on

each sun visor.

To open, fold the cover up.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mirror

lighting comes on when the cover is opened.

Digital compass

1 Adjustment button on the back of the mir‐

ror

2 Display

The display shows the main or secondary com‐

pass direction in which the vehicle is traveling.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing

the adjustment button with a pointed object

such as a pen. The following adjustment op‐

tions are displayed one after the other, de‐

Seite 96

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

pending on how long the adjustment button is

pressed:

▷ Press briefly: switch the display on/off.

▷ 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone.

▷ 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass.

▷ 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right hand

steering.

▷ 12 to 15 seconds: set the language.

Setting compass zones

Set the compass zone corresponding to the ve‐

hicle's geographic location so that the compass

can function correctly; refer to the world map

with compass zones.

Press the adjustment button for 3‑4 seconds.

The number of the compass zone set is shown

in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the

adjustment button repeatedly until the display

shows the number of the compass zone corre‐

sponding to the current location.

The compass is operational again after approx.

10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the

following situations:

▷ An incorrect compass direction is shown.

▷ The cardinal direction displayed does not

change even if the direction of travel

changes.

▷ Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure

1. Make sure that there are no large metal ob‐

jects or overhead power lines in the vicinity

of the vehicle and that there is enough

space to drive in a circle.

2. Set the currently valid compass zone.

3. Press the adjustment button for 6‑7 sec‐

onds to call up C. Then drive at least one full

circle at a maximum speed of

4 mph/7 km/h. When the system is cali‐

brated, the C is replaced by the compass di‐

rections.

Seite 97

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Right-hand/left-hand steering

The digital compass is set for right-hand or left-

hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press the adjustment button for 12‑13 seconds.

Briefly press the adjustment button again to

switch between English "E" and German "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx.

10 seconds.

Cupholders and ashtray/

lighter

Cupholders

Two cupholders are located in the center con‐

sole in the front.

MINI Countryman: two additional cupholders

are located at the end of the center console in

the rear. Additional cupholders can be installed

on the center rail.

MINI Paceman: additional cupholders are lo‐

cated in the console between the rear seats.

Depending on the equipment, additional cu‐

pholders can be installed on the center rail.

Shatter-proof containers and no hot

drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do

not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the

increased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containers

Do not forcefully push unsuitable contain‐

ers into the cupholders. This may result in dam‐

age.◀

Ashtray

The ashtray is located in one of the cupholders

in the center console at the front.

Emptying

Take out the entire ashtray, arrow.

When installing, ensure that the ashtray is in‐

serted in the cupholder with the adapter.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition

switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

Seite 98

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops

back out.

Danger of burns

Only hold the hot lighter by its head; oth‐

erwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Switch off the ignition and take the remote

control with you when leaving the vehicle so

that children cannot use the lighter and burn

themselves.◀

Connecting electrical de‐

vices

The lighter socket can be used as a socket for

electrical equipment while the engine is run‐

ning or when the ignition is switched on. The

total load of all sockets must not exceed

140 watts at 12 volt.

Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to

insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Do not connect the charger to the socket

Do not connect the battery charger to the

socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as

this could damage the battery.◀

Replace the cover after use

Replace the lighter or socket cover after

use; otherwise, objects that fall into the lighter

socket or power socket could cause a short cir‐

cuit.◀

Socket in the center console

Remove the cover or lighter, refer to page 98,

from the socket.

Socket in the rear

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Socket in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

Take out the cover.

Seite 99

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Paceman

Take out the cover.

Cargo area

Cargo cover

Do not place objects on the covers

Do not place objects on the cover; if you

do so, they may pose a danger to vehicle occu‐

pants during braking or evasive maneuvers or

damage the cover.◀

Move the cover into position

When closing, ensure that the cargo cover

is resting on the rubber buffers of the securing

straps; otherwise, damage may occur when

closing the tailgate.◀

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is

raised.

To load bulky luggage, the cover can be re‐

moved.

Detach the securing straps from the tail‐

gate.

2. Lift the cover slightly, arrow 1, and pull it

back and out of the bracket, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

MINI Countryman: rear seat backrests

Danger of pinching

Before folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that path of movement of the

backrests is clear. Especially when the middle

section is folded down, ensure that no one is

located in or reaches into the path of move‐

ment of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, in‐

juries or damage may result.◀

Observe the instructions concerning the

safety belt

Observe the instructions concerning the safety

belt, refer to page 37. Otherwise, personal pro‐

tection may be compromised.◀

The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of

40-20-40.

When the outer rear seat backrests are folded

down, it is not permissible for a person to travel

on the center seat.

Remove the third head restraint, refer to

page 40, if necessary.

Seite 100

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

100

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Open the center safety belt and insert it in the

belt holder on the headliner, refer to page 38.

Enlarge the cargo area by adjusting the rear

seat backrests to a more upright position.

The backrests can be adjusted to 10 different

positions between the comfort and transport

positions and they can be folded down.

In the comfort position, the backrests are tilted

back to the greatest possible angle and in the

transport position they are nearly vertical.

Before beginning with the mounting of a child

restraint fixing system, note the instructions,

refer to page 43.

Hold the top of the backrest, for example

the head restraint, and pull on the loop, ar‐

row.

2. Engage the backrest in the desired position

or fold it down.

Folding the backrests back up

Locking the backrest

When folding back, ensure that the locks

engage properly; otherwise, cargo could be

catapulted forward into the passenger com‐

partment during braking maneuvers and

swerving, endangering the occupants.◀

No child restraint fixing systems

Do not mount child restraint fixing sys‐

tems in the rear when the rear seat backrests

are adjusted to a more vertical position; other‐

wise, the protection provided by these systems

may be reduced.◀

When the backrests are folded back up, they

engage in the transport position.

To set the desired backrest inclination or com‐

fort position, hold the backrest, pull the loop

forward, and adjust the backrest.

MINI Paceman: rear seat backrests

Danger of pinching

Before folding down the rear seat back‐

rests, ensure that path of movement of the

backrests is clear; otherwise, injuries or damage

may result.◀

Fold the belt buckles down.

2. Pull on the respective loop, arrow.

The backrest is unlocked.

3. Fold the backrest forward.

Folding the backrests back up

Hold the top of the backrest, for example the

head restraint, and fold it back.

Locking the backrest

When folding back, ensure that the locks

engage properly; otherwise, cargo could be

catapulted forward into the passenger com‐

Seite 101

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

101

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

partment during braking maneuvers and

swerving, endangering the occupants.◀

Flat loading floor

Maximum load

Do not exceed the maximum load of

330 lbs, 150 kg, on the loading floor; otherwise,

damage may result.◀

Access to storage area

A storage area for items like the partition net is

found under the loading floor.

Reach into the recess, arrow 1, on the rear

edge of the loading floor.

2. Lift the loading floor at the rear, arrow 1,

and fold it forward, arrow 2.

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Before closing the tailgate, lower the loading

floor back onto the cargo area floor.

Removing

The loading floor can be removed if necessary.

1. Fold up the loading floor.

2. Pull it back slightly and out of the holders.

3. Then remove it upward.

The folded loading floor can be stored in the

cargo area.

MINI Countryman: partition net

Firmly attach the partition net

Make sure that the partition net is firmly

attached; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Before installing

Remove the pouch with the partition net

from the storage compartment under the

loading floor in the cargo area.

2. Take the partition net out of the pouch, un‐

roll it, and unfold it.

After use, fold and roll up the partition net

in the same manner and place it in the

pouch so that it can be stowed back under

the cargo floor panel. Ensure that hooks

and tensioning buckles do not rest on the

rod elements.

3. Unfold the partition net to the point where

the rod elements engage.

Installation behind the front seats

Take out the cargo cover if necessary.

2. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to

Enlarging the cargo area.

Seite 102

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

102

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

3. Insert the retaining pins of the partition net

all the way into the front holders in the

headliner, arrow 1, and push forward.

4. Attach the hooks, arrow 2, at the bottom of

the retaining straps on both sides to the

eyelets on the vehicle floor.

5. Lash the partition net tightly. To do this,

tighten the retaining straps using the ten‐

sioning buckles.

Removing

To remove and stow the partition net, proceed

in reverse order.

To fold up, press the release button, arrow.

MINI Countryman: multi-function hook

Hooks designed for hanging shopping bags and

totes, for example, are located on the left and

right sides of the cargo cover support, arrow.

Do not hang heavy items from the hooks

Only hang light bags or suitable objects

from the holders. Otherwise, there is a danger

of objects flying about during braking and eva‐

sive maneuvers.

Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it

has been appropriately secured.◀

Seite 103

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

103

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Storage compartments

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Notes

No loose objects in the passenger com‐

partment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger com‐

partment without securing them; otherwise,

they may present a danger to occupants for in‐

stance during braking and avoidance maneu‐

vers.◀

No non-slip mats on the dashboard

Do not use non-slip materials, such as

non-slip mats, on the dashboard, or it could be

damaged by the substances in the materials.◀

Storage compartments

Interior

▷ Glove compartment, refer to page 104.

▷ Center armrest, refer to page 105.

▷ Center rail, refer to page 105.

▷ Compartments in the center console.

▷ Compartments in the doors.

▷ Pockets on the back of the front seat back‐

rests.

▷ Cupholders, refer to page 98.

▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 105.

Cargo area

▷ Lashing eyes, refer to page 116.

▷ Storage compartment under the flat load‐

ing floor, refer to page 102.

▷ Multi-function hook on the cargo cover

support, refer to page 103.

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle to open the lid.

The light in the glove compartment switches

on.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

Close the glove compartment again im‐

mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately after

use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur

during accidents.◀

Seite 104

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

104

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Center armrest

The center armrest between the front seats

contains a storage compartment or a cover for

the snap-in adapter, refer to page 143, de‐

pending on the equipment.

Do not position tall accessory parts directly on

the center rail of the center armrest; otherwise,

they may be damaged when the center arm‐

rest is opened or closed.

Center armrest front

Opening

Press the button, arrow, and pull up the lid.

Center rail

Various accessory parts can be mounted on the

center rail and moved to different positions.

Do not use accessory parts in the area of the

parking brake; otherwise, they may become

damaged when the parking brake lever is acti‐

vated.

Base plate

Various accessory parts such as cupholders can

be mounted on the base plate.

Inserting the base plate

The lever 3 can be engaged in three positions.

0 Setting

1 Adjusting the position on the rail

2 Inserting the base plate

To insert, move the lever to position 2.

Adjusting the position and fixing

Push lever 3 into position 1.

2. Adjust the position of the base plate.

3. Push lever 3 downward into position 0.

Do not apply excessive pressure to the

lever.

The base plate is fixed.

Fix the base plate

Fix the base plate before driving away;

otherwise, injuries may result during an acci‐

dent.◀

Clothes hooks

Clothes hooks are located on the grab handles

in the rear.

Do not obstruct view

When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐

er's vision.◀

No heavy objects

Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger

to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐

neuvers.◀

Seite 105

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

105

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Connection for an exter‐

nal audio device

This can be used to connect an external audio

device, such as a CD or MP3 player.

Radio MINI Boost CD, refer to page 130.

Seite 106

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

106

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seite 107

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

107

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Breaking-in period

General information

Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to

each other.

The following instructions will help achieve a

long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and differential

Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but

do not exceed:

▷ For a gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and

100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the

transmission's kickdown mode for the initial

miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be

increased.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their

manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac‐

tion potential until after an initial breaking-in

period.

Drive conservatively for the first

200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐

prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized

contact and wear patterns between brake pads

and discs. Drive cautiously during this break-in

period.

Clutch

The clutch requires an initial break-in period of

approx. 300 miles/500 km to function at an op‐

timal level.

During this break-in period, engage the clutch

gently.

Following part replacement

The same breaking in procedures should be ob‐

served if any of the components mentioned

above have to be renewed in the course of the

vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Ground clearance

Ensure adequate ground clearance

Ensure adequate ground clearance, e.g.,

when driving into underground garages, when

driving over curbs, or when driving in winter;

otherwise, damage may occur to the vehicle.◀

Seite 110

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

110

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Closing the tailgate

Drive with the tailgate closed

Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐

wise, passengers and other road users may be

endangered or the vehicle may be damaged if

an accident occurs or during braking or swerv‐

ing. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the

passenger compartment.◀

If, despite this, the vehicle must be driven with

the tailgate open:

▷ Drive moderately.

▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.

▷ Switch off recirculated air mode and greatly

increase the blower speed.

Hot exhaust system

High temperatures are generated in the

exhaust system.

Do not remove the heat shields installed and

never apply undercoating to them. Make sure

that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves,

grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot

exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐

sition mode, or when parked. Such contact

could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐

ous personal injury as well as property damage.

Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise,

there is the danger of getting burned.◀

Mobile communication devices in the

vehicle

Mobile communication devices in the ve‐

hicle

It is not recommended to use mobile phones,

such as mobile phones without a direct con‐

nection to an external aerial in the vehicle's

passenger compartment. Otherwise, the vehi‐

cle electronics and mobile communication de‐

vices can interfere with each other. In addition,

there is no assurance that the radiation gener‐

ated during transmission will be discharged

from the vehicle interior.◀

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can

form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐

ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete

loss of contact between the tires and the road

surface, ultimately undermining your ability to

steer and brake the vehicle.

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐

duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tire

tread depth decreases. Minimum tread depth,

refer to page 158.

Driving through water

Drive though calm water only if it is not deeper

than 12 inches/30 cm and at this height, no

faster than walking speed, up to

6 mph/10 km/h.

Using the parking brake on inclines

Using the parking brake

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle sta‐

tionary with a slipping clutch for extended pe‐

riod; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise,

the clutch will be subject to increased wear.◀

Support from the hill drive-off assistant, refer to

page 83.

Braking safely

The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard

feature.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective

way of braking in situations when this is neces‐

sary.

The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness.

You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini‐

mum of steering effort.

Seite 111

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS

111

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from

the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its

active mode.

Do not let your foot rest on the brake

pedal

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake

pedal. Even light but consistent pedal pressure

can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and

possibly even brake failure.◀

Objects in the area around the pedals

No objects in the area around the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;

otherwise, the function of the pedals could be

impeded while driving

Do not place additional floor mats over existing

mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved

for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in

place.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened

again when they are returned after being re‐

moved, such as for cleaning.◀

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,

briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal

every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other

road users.

The heat generated in this process helps dry

the brake discs and pads.

In this way braking efficiency will be available

when you need it.

Hills

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

gear in which the least braking is required. Oth‐

erwise, the brake system may overheat, result‐

ing in a reduction in the brake system effi‐

ciency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by

shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if

necessary.

Downshifting in manual mode of the Steptronic

transmission, refer to page 56.

Avoid load on the brakes

Avoid placing excessive load on the brake

system. Light but consistent brake pressure can

lead to high temperatures, brake wear and

possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutral

Never drive with the transmission in neu‐

tral, with the engine switched off or with the

clutch depressed; otherwise, you will have nei‐

ther the braking action of the engine or nor its

power assistance when braking or steering.◀

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐

tion on the brake pads are furthered by:

▷ Low mileage.

▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not

used at all.

▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.

Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure

that must be exerted by the pads during brake

applications to clean the discs is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the

brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐

fect that generally cannot be corrected.

When the vehicle is parked

When using the automatic climate control, con‐

densation water develops that exits under‐

neath the vehicle.

Therefore, traces of condensed water under the

vehicle are normal.

After the engine is switched off, the coolant

pump may continue running for some time in

the MINI Cooper S. This causes noises in the en‐

gine compartment.

Seite 112

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

112

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Driving on poor roads

Your MINI with ALL4 all-wheel drive feels com‐

fortable on all streets and roads. It combines an

all-wheel drive system with the advantages of a

normal passenger car.

Do not drive on unpaved terrain

Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as oth‐

erwise the vehicle may be damaged.◀

For your own safety and the safety of passen‐

gers and the vehicle, adhere to the following

points:

▷ Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before

driving; never take risks.

▷ Adjust speeds according to road conditions.

The steeper and rougher the road surface

is, the lower the speed should be.

▷ When driving on steep uphill and downhill

grades: the engine oil and coolant should

be filled nearly to the MAX mark.

▷ Watch for stones, holes, and other obsta‐

cles and drive around these where possible.

▷ On bumps and rough roads, avoid contact

between the vehicle body and the ground.

The maximum ground clearance is 6 in‐

ches/15 cm and may vary with the loaded

cargo.

▷ When driving through water, do not exceed

the maximum water height of 12 in‐

ches/30 cm and drive at walking speed.

▷ After driving through water, press on the

brake pedal several times at low speeds to

dry the brakes.

▷ Depending on the prevailing terrain, acti‐

vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly,

refer to page 82.

▷ When the wheels spin, accelerate to enable

the driving stability control systems to dis‐

tribute the drive force to the individual

wheels.

After driving on poor roads

Adhere to the following points to ensure vehi‐

cle safety:

▷ Remove excessive accumulations of dirt

and mud from the vehicle body.

▷ Clear mud, snow, ice, etc., from the wheels

and tires and check for damage.

Seite 113

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS

113

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

General information

Overloading the vehicle

To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐

ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐

hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and

increases the rate at which damage develops

inside the tires. This could result in a sudden

loss of tire inflation pressure.◀

No fluids in the cargo area

Make sure that fluids do not leak into the

cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐

aged.◀

Determining the load

limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐

hicle's placard:

▷ The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐

hicle and unstable driving situations

may result.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding in

your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY

pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐

pacity.

For example, if the YYY amount equals

1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐

sengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity

is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =

400 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the

Seite 114

DRIVING TIPS

114

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transfered to your

vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting

a trailer to determine how this may reduce

the available cargo and luggage load ca‐

pacity of your vehicle.

Load

4-seater:

5-seater:

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the

less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo

▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not

occupied, secure each of the outer safety

belts in the opposite buckle.

▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward and as

low as possible, ideally directly behind the

backrests.

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners.

▷ Do not pile cargo higher than the top edge

of the backrests.

▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests

to stow cargo.

▷ Use the partition net, refer to page 102, to

protect passengers. Make sure that objects

cannot penetrate the partition net.

▷ Place protective material around any sharp-

edged or pointed objects that could bump

against the rear window while the vehicle is

in motion.

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Seite 115

DRIVING TIPS

115

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

MINI Countryman

MINI Paceman

Securing cargo

▷ Secure smaller and lighter pieces with tight‐

ening belts or straps.

▷ Secure larger and heavier pieces with cargo

straps.

Adhere to the information included with

the cargo straps.

▷ Eight mounting eyes are available for fas‐

tening the cargo straps.

Two of them are located on the side wall of

the cargo area, arrows 1, and two are lo‐

cated on the rear wall of the cargo area, ar‐

rows 2.

Securing cargo

Stow and secure the cargo as described

above; otherwise it may present a danger to

the occupants, for instance during braking and

avoidance maneuvers.

Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the

passenger compartment without securing

them; otherwise, they may present a danger to

occupants, for instance during braking and

avoidance maneuvers.

Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle

weight or either of the approved axle loads, as

excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and

may also place you in violation of traffic safety

laws.

Do not secure cargo using the upper LATCH

mounting points, refer to page 45; otherwise,

these may become damaged.◀

Roof-mounted luggage

rack

Notes

A special rack system is available as an optional

accessory.

Attachment

Follow the installation instructions for the roof-

mounted luggage rack.

Ensure that adequate clearance is available for

the movement of the glass sunroof.

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of

gravity when loaded, they have a major effect

on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and

driving:

▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle

weight.

Seite 116

DRIVING TIPS

116

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.

▷ The roof load should not be too large in

area.

▷ Always load the heaviest pieces on the bot‐

tom.

▷ Fasten the roof-mounted luggage securely,

for instance using lashing straps.

▷ Do not let objects project into the opening

path of the tailgate.

▷ Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration

and braking maneuvers. Take corners gen‐

tly.

Rear luggage rack

Notes

A special rear rack is available as an optional

accessory. It does not require a trailer hitch.

Follow the installation instructions for the rear

rack.

Anchorage points

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

The anchorage points are under the covers in

the bumper.

Push out the covers on the corresponding cut‐

outs.

When loading the vehicle, ensure that the ap‐

proved gross vehicle weight and the axle loads

are not exceeded. Adhere to the weight specifi‐

cations in the technical data.

Seite 117

DRIVING TIPS

117

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Saving fuel

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

General information

Your vehicle contains advanced technology for

the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐

sions.

Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐

ferent factors. The implementation of certain

measures, driving style and regular mainte‐

nance can have an influence on fuel consump‐

tion and on the environmental impact.

Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove attached parts following use

Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or

rear luggage racks after use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐

dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Close both windows

Open windows causes higher air resistance and

thus increases fuel consumption.

Check the tire inflation pressure

regularly

Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐

tion pressure, refer to page 152, at least twice

a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐

sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and

tire wear.

Drive away without delay

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while

the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving

right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to

reach its operating temperature.

Look well ahead when driving

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To

achieve this, maintain a suitable distance to the

vehicle driving ahead of you.

Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces

fuel consumption.

Avoid high engine speeds

Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Be‐

ginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When

accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐

gine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into

the highest applicable gear and drive with the

engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐

stant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers

fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Use coasting conditions

When approaching a red light, take your foot

off the accelerator and coast to a halt in the

highest applicable gear.

Seite 118

DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

118

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

On a downhill slope, take your foot off the ac‐

celerator and coast in a suitable gear.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

Switch off the engine during longer

stops

Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,

at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic

congestion.

Fuel savings are already achieved after the en‐

gine is turned off for as little as 4 seconds.

Switch off any functions that are not

currently needed

Functions such as seat heating and the rear

window defroster require a lot of energy and

consume additional fuel, especially in city and

stop-and-go traffic.

Therefore, switch off these functions if they are

not actually needed.

Have maintenance carried out

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve

optimal vehicle economy and operating life.

Have the maintenance carried out by the serv‐

ice center.

Please also note the MINI maintenance system,

refer to page 169.

Seite 119

Saving fuel

DRIVING TIPS

119

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

ROCK ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Radio MINI Boost CD

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

General information

At a glance

1 Change the audio sources.

2 On/off, volume.

▷ Press: switch on/off.

▷ Turn: adjust the volume.

3 Show the tone settings.

4 Function buttons for selecting the menu

items shown directly above them on the

display.

5 Change the station or track.

6 Display.

7 Select the functions.

▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on the

display or set the value.

▷ Press: select the highlighted menu item

or store the settings.

8 Place/end calls.

9 Opens the main menu.

10 Manually select the frequency.

Seite 122

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio MINI Boost CD

122

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

11 CD slot. 12 Eject the CD.

Representation in the Owner's Manual

"…" Identifies radio display texts used to select

individual functions.

Menu navigation

Radio and telephone functions can be opened

using buttons on the radio and menus.

Opening menu items

To display the menu items:

▷

Press the button once for the audio

sources menu.

▷

Press the button for the main

menu.

Selecting menu items

There are several ways to select a menu item

on the display.

Using the right knob

▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,

arrow 2.

▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,

arrow 1.

Using the function buttons

Press the left or right side of the function

button under the menu item.

If only one menu item is displayed above the

function button, press the middle of the button.

Via the MODE button

Press the button repeatedly until the

desired audio menu is selected.

Symbols on the display

Symbol Meaning

Function is selected.

Function is activated.

The function is deactivated.

Leave the menu, one menu back.

Display additional menu items.

Scroll display. The list contains more

than two entries.

Change to the higher level directory.

Setting values

For setting numerical values or values on a

scale:

Mark the desired menu item and press the

right knob.

2. Turn the right knob to set the value.

3. Press the right knob to store the value.

Switching on/off

Press the left knob. The radio selects the audio

source set last: radio, satellite radio, CD, exter‐

nal audio device, or USB audio interface.

Listening to the radio with the ignition

switched off

When the radio ready state or the ignition is

switched off, the radio functions are available

Seite 123

Radio MINI Boost CD

ENTERTAINMENT

123

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

for approx. 20 minutes. To listen to the radio,

switch it back on.

To spare the battery, ensure that the radio is

switched off when you leave the vehicle.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the left knob. The setting is stored for the

remote control currently in use.

When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐

tem, the audio sources are muted.

Speed-dependent volume and volumes

of PDC signal tone and gong

▷ "PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone com‐

pared to the audio sources.

▷ "GONG": volume of the gong compared to

the audio sources.

▷ "S-VOL": speed-dependent volume control.

Set the audio sources to a high volume to be

able to adjust the volume of the signal tones

more easily.

1. Press the button.

2. Select the symbol if necessary.

3. Select the desired volume setting.

4. Set the desired volume and press the right

knob.

Volume of external audio devices

An external audio device such as an MP3 player

can be connected via the AUX-IN port in the

center console and the audio tracks can be

played over the car's loudspeaker system.

The volume of the external audio device can be

adjusted to the car radio.

1. Press the button.

2. "AUX"

3. "Vol-AUX"

4. Set the desired volume and press the right

knob.

Tone settings

▷ "BASS": depth adjustment.

▷ "TREBLE": treble adjustment.

▷ "FADER": front/rear volume distribution.

▷ "BAL": left/right volume distribution.

The sound settings are set globally for all audio

sources.

Setting the treble, bass, and volume

distribution

Press the button.

2. Highlight the desired tone setting and press

the right knob.

3. Create the desired setting and press the

right knob.

Resetting the tone settings

The tone settings are reset to medium values.

1. Press the button.

2. "RESET"

Time

Setting the time, date, and time format

Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "CONFIG"

4. "TIME"

5. Select the desired category.

6. Create the settings and press the right

knob.

Seite 124

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio MINI Boost CD

124

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Setting the units of measure of the

computer and the language

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "CONFIG"

▷ "DIST": change the unit of measure for

the range.

▷ "LANG": select the language of the dis‐

play texts.

▷ "CONSMP": change the unit of measure

for the average fuel consumption.

▷ "TEMP": change the unit of measure for

the external temperature.

5. Highlight the desired menu item and press

the button.

6. Create the desired setting.

Computer

The following vehicle information can be call up

via the computer:

▷ Average fuel consumption

▷ Average speed

▷ Range

Displaying information

Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "COMP"

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for

the time during which the engine is running.

To start calculation of the average fuel con‐

sumption:

"CONSMP"

2. "RESET"

The previous display is set to zero and the sys‐

tem begins recalculating the average fuel con‐

sumption.

Average speed

The average speed is calculated for the time

during which the engine is running.

To start calculation of the average speed:

1. "SPEED"

2. "RESET"

Estimated range

"RANGE"

The display shows the estimated distance that

can be still be driven on the remaining fuel,

taking into consideration the driving style over

the last 18 miles/30 km.

Radio

Listening to the radio

The radio is designed for reception in the FM

and AM wavebands.

Switch on the radio, refer to page 123.

Press this button if necessary.

3. "TUNER"

4. "FM" or"AM"

Press the corresponding button repeatedly

until the desired waveband is displayed.

▷ FM: FM1, FM2, FMA

▷ AM: AM, AMA

Selecting a station

The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐

rently in use.

Next station

Press the button.

Seite 125

Radio MINI Boost CD

ENTERTAINMENT

125

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

The next station with reception is selected.

Selecting the station manually by

frequency

Press the button.

▷ Press the respective function button to

set the desired frequency.

▷ Turn the right knob until the desired

frequency is set.

Automatically updating the stations

with the best reception, AUTOSTORE

In the FMA and AMA memory levels, stations

are automatically stored according to their re‐

ception strength. If the AUTOSTORE function is

not used, six stations can be manually stored in

each of the FMA and AMA memory levels.

"FM" or"AM"

Press the corresponding button until the

following is displayed:

"AUTOSTORE"

It may take several seconds for the stations to

be stored and for one of these stations to be

played back.

Briefly playing and selecting a station

"SC"

All stations with reception are played briefly.

To interrupt the function and select a station:

"SC"

Storing and retrieving a station

Memory locations

It is possible to store up to 30 stations.

▷ FM1, FM2, AM: six stations each.

▷ FMA, AMA: the six stations with the best re‐

ception (automatically) or any six stations

(manually).

Storing a station

1. "FM" or"AM"

Select the desired function repeatedly until

the desired waveband is displayed.

2. Select the station.

3. "1" ... "6"

Press and hold the function button under

the desired memory location until the sta‐

tion is audible again after a brief interrup‐

tion.

Retrieving a stored station

"FM" or"AM"

Select the desired function repeatedly until

the desired waveband is displayed.

2. "1" ... "6"

Press and hold the desired function button

or turn the right knob until the desired sta‐

tion is displayed.

Radio Data System, RDS

RDS broadcasts additional information, such as

the station name or text messages, in the FM

waveband. When playing a station with multi‐

ple frequencies, the system automatically

switches to the frequency with the best recep‐

tion, if needed.

Some stations broadcast the type of program

received, or PTY, via RDS. This information is

displayed briefly when the station is selected,

for instance NEWS.

PTY can also be used to display catastrophe

alerts, such as "ALARM".

The alert is issued on the loudspeakers.

Switching the RDS on/off

"SET"

2. "RDS"

When the RDS is switched off, the PTY function

is switched off as well.

Seite 126

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio MINI Boost CD

126

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Switching the program type display

on/off

1. "SET"

2. "PTY"

HD Radio™ reception

Many stations broadcast both analog and digi‐

tal signals. These stations can be received digi‐

tally and therefore with better sound quality. A

digital radio network must be available to be

able to receive digital stations.

License conditions

HD Radio Technology manufactured under li‐

cense from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S.

and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD,

HD Radio, and Arc logos are proprietary trade‐

marks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Activating/deactivating digital radio

reception

1. Press the button.

2. "TUNER"

3. "SET"

4. "HD"

Displays

▷ "HD": a station is received digitally.

▷ "(HD)": a station broadcasts digital signals

but digital radio reception is switched off.

In areas in which the selected station is not

continuously received in digital mode, playback

switches between analog and digital reception.

In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Selecting the programs of a digital

station

Some stations broadcast multiple programs. To

select one of these programs:

1. Press the button repeatedly

until the desired digital station is displayed.

If a station broadcasts multiple programs,

the following display appears, for example:

"HD1"

2. "LIST"

3. "HD1" ... "HD8" Select the desired pro‐

gram. Up to eight programs can be se‐

lected per station.

Displaying additional information

For digital stations, additional information can

be displayed on the current track, such as the

name of the artist.

"INFO"

Operational displays

▷ "acquiring": the system is looking for digital

stations.

▷ "No Signal": no digital stations are being re‐

ceived.

Satellite radio

Over 100 different channels with high fidelity

can be received. The channels are offered in

fixed packages and must be activated.

You may experience signal drops and muting

events related to this new technology.

Activating or deactivated channels

1. Press the button.

2. "SAT"

3. "CAT"

4. Select the desired category.

The channels are displayed.

This symbol identifies the current chan‐

nel.

Activating

Turn the right knob to select a channel that

is not yet activated.

2. Press the right knob to confirm a channel.

Seite 127

Radio MINI Boost CD

ENTERTAINMENT

127

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

A phone number and the electronic serial

number, ESN, are displayed. The electronic

serial number is required for activation.

3. To have the channels activated, call the

phone number.

Deactivating

Press the button.

2. "SAT"

3. "SAT"

Hold the button down.

A phone number and the electronic serial

number, ESN, are displayed. The electronic

serial number is required for deactivation.

4. To have the channels deactivated, call the

phone number.

Selecting and storing a channel

1. Press the button.

2. "SAT"

3. "CAT"

4. Select the desired category.

5. Select the desired channel.

To display all channels:

"ALL"

To store a channel:

Select the symbol.

2. "SAT"

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐

sired memory level, SAT 1 or SAT 2, is

reached.

3. "1" ... "6"

Press and hold the function button under

the desired memory location until the

channel is audible again after a brief inter‐

ruption.

Changing to the current channel

"CURR"

Additional information

The name of the channel and additional infor‐

mation on the current track are displayed, such

as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired channel.

2. "INFO"

Changing the channel using the buttons

Press the button for the corre‐

sponding direction. The next enabled channel

is opened.

1. Press and hold the button for

the corresponding direction. The activated

channels appear on the display one after

the other.

2. Release the button to select the displayed

channel.

Notes

When there is a signal blockage or the trans‐

mission is suspended momentarily for more

than 4 seconds, a message will appear on the

display.

Service may be interrupted or unavailable for

specific reasons such as environmental or topo‐

graphic conditions and others that Satellite

Radio cannot directly control. Signal may not be

available under tunnels, in parking garages,

next to tall buildings, nearby trees with dense

foliage, nearby mountains or other possible

strong sources of radio interference. Service

should resume normally after the source of sig‐

nal unavailability has been cleared.

CD player

Loading the CD player

Insert the CD into the CD drive with the printed

side up.

Seite 128

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio MINI Boost CD

128

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Playback begins automatically.

Reading can take a few minutes with com‐

pressed audio files.

Starting the CD player

A CD is contained in the CD player.

1. Switch on the car radio if necessary.

Press the button.

3. "CD"

Skipping to another track

Press the button repeatedly until

the desired track is played.

With the right knob:

Turn the right knob until the desired track is

played back.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold the button down.

Tracks can be heard but are distorted.

Briefly playing and selecting a track

"SC"

All tracks are played briefly one after the other.

To interrupt the function and select a track:

"SC"

Random playback

"RND"

To end random playback:

"RND"

Compressed audio files

CD players can play back CDs with compressed

audio data: MP3 and WMA.

Selecting a track

1. "LIST"

2. Select the desired directory using the right

knob.

▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐

rectory.

▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐

rectory.

3. Select other directories if you wish.

4. Highlight the desired track and press the

right knob.

You can scroll through the directories during

playback.

To change to the current track:

"CURR"

Displaying information on the track

Any information stored on the currently se‐

lected track can be displayed.

"LIST"

2. "TRACK"

Ejecting a CD from the CD player

Press the button.

The CD emerges slightly from the CD drive.

Operational displays

▷ "Insert CD"

The CD slot is empty.

▷ "Error CD"

The CD cannot be read or is defective.

▷ "Temp. CD"

Operating temperature is too high.

Seite 129

Radio MINI Boost CD

ENTERTAINMENT

129

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Notes

CD player

Do not remove the cover

The CD players are officially designated

Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the

cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye dam‐

age can result.◀

CDs

Using CDs

▷ Do not use self-recorded CDs with la‐

bels applied, as these can become

detached during playback due to

heat buildup and can cause irrepara‐

ble damage to the device.

▷ Only use round CDs with a standard diame‐

ter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs

with an adapter, e.g., single CDs; otherwise,

the CDs or the adapter may jam and no lon‐

ger eject.◀

General malfunctions

▷ The CD players have been optimized for

performance in vehicles. In some instances

they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs

than stationary devices would be.

▷ If a CD cannot be played, first check if it has

been inserted correctly.

Humidity

High levels of humidity can lead to condensa‐

tion on the CD or the laser's scan lens, and tem‐

porarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with particular CDs

If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs,

this can be due to one of the following causes:

Self-recorded CDs

▷ Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-

recorded CDs are inconsistent data creation

or recording processes, or poor quality or

old age of the blank CD.

▷ Only label CDs on the upper side with a pen

intended for this purpose.

Damage

▷ Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and

moisture.

▷ Store CDs in a sleeve.

▷ Do not subject CDs to temperatures over

50 ℃/122 ℉, high humidity, or direct sun‐

light.

CDs with copy protection

CDs are often provided with a copy protection

feature by the manufacturer. This can mean

that some CDs cannot be played or can only be

played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION

This product contains copyrighted technology

that is based on multiple registered US patents

and the intellectual property of the Macrovision

Corporation and other manufacturers. The use

of this copy protection must be approved by

Macrovision. Media protected by this product -

unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision -

may only be used for private purposes. Copying

of this technology is prohibited.

External devices

AUX-IN port

At a glance

▷ For connecting audio devices, e.g., MP3

player. The sound is output on the vehicle

loudspeakers.

▷ Recommendation: use medium tone and

volume settings on the audio device. The

tone depends on the quality of the audio

files.

Seite 130

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio MINI Boost CD

130

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Connecting

The AUX-IN port is in the center

console.

Connect the headphone connec‐

tor or line-out connector of the

device to the AUX-IN port.

Ensure that the connector is inserted all the

way into the AUX-IN port.

Playback

Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.

Press the button.

3. "AUX"

Volume

The volume of the sound output is dependent

on the audio device. If this volume differs

markedly from the volume of the other audio

sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

Adjusting the volume

1. Press the button.

2. "AUX"

3. "Vol-AUX"

4. Connect the audio device, switch it on and

select a track on the audio device.

USB audio interface

At a glance

It is possible to connect external audio devices.

The sound is output on the vehicle loudspeak‐

ers.

Connectors for external devices

▷ Connection via USB audio interface: Apple

iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g., MP3 play‐

ers, USB flash drives, or mobile phones that

are supported by the USB audio interface.

▷ External audio devices, e.g. MP3 player:

connection via AUX-IN socket.

▷ Connection via snap-in adapter, refer to

page 143, when equipped with the music

interface for smartphones: Apple iPhone or

mobile phones.

Playback is only possible if no audio device

is connected to the analog AUX-IN port.

Due to the large number of different audio de‐

vices available on the market, it cannot be en‐

sured that every audio device/mobile phone is

operable on the vehicle. Additional information

can be obtained at www.mini.com/connectivity

or from the service center.

Audio files

Standard audio files can be played back:

▷ MP3.

▷ WMA.

▷ WAV (PCM).

▷ AAC, M4A.

▷ Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS.

File system

Standard file systems for USB devices are sup‐

ported. The FAT 32 format is recommended.

Seite 131

Radio MINI Boost CD

ENTERTAINMENT

131

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Connecting

The USB audio interface is in the

center console.

Connection of Apple iPod/iPhone via USB

audio interface

To connect the iPod, use the special cable

adapter for the Apple iPod. Additional informa‐

tion can be obtained from the service center or

on the Internet: www.mini.com/connectivity

Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone with the AUX-

IN port and USB interface.

The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup‐

ported by the USB audio interface.

Connection of a USB device via the USB

audio interface

Connect using a flexible adapter cable to pro‐

tect the USB audio interface and the USB device

against physical damage.

Connect the USB device to the USB interface.

Audio device

Connect the headphone connector or line-out

connector of the device to the AUX-IN port of

the USB audio interface.

Ensure that the connector is inserted all the

way into the AUX-IN port.

After connecting for the first time

Information on all music tracks, e.g. artist or

type of music, as well as playback lists are

transmitted into the vehicle. This may take

some time, depending on the USB device and

the number of tracks.

During transmission, the tracks can be called up

via the file directory.

Number of tracks

Information from up to four USB devices or for

approx. 20,000 tracks can be stored in the ve‐

hicle. If a fifth device is connected or if more

than 20,000 tracks are stored, information on

existing tracks may be deleted.

Copy protection

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Man‐

agement (DRM) cannot be played.

Playback

1. Press the button.

2. "IPOD" or "USB" or "AUX"

Changing the music track

Skipping to another track

It is possible to skip to another track within the

selected directory.

Press the button repeatedly until

the desired track is played.

With the right knob:

Turn the right knob until the desired track is

played back.

Fast forward/reverse

Hold the button down.

Tracks can be heard but are distorted.

Seite 132

ENTERTAINMENT

Radio MINI Boost CD

132

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Random playback

"RND"

To end random playback: "RND"

Selecting a track

Depending on the connected device, the track

can be selected via the following category:

▷ "LIST": playback lists.

▷ "GEN": musical genre.

▷ "ART": artist.

▷ "ALB": album.

1. Select the desired category.

2. If necessary, select the desired directory us‐

ing the right knob.

▷ : press the right knob to open a di‐

rectory.

▷ : press the right knob to close a di‐

rectory.

3. Select other directories if you wish.

4. Highlight the desired track and press the

right knob.

You can scroll through the directories during

playback.

To change to the current track:

"CURR"

Displaying information on the track

Any information stored on the currently se‐

lected track can be displayed.

"TRACK"

Adjusting the volume

The volume of the sound output is dependent

on the audio device. If this volume differs

markedly from the volume of the other audio

sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

"LEV"

2. Turn the right knob until the desired vol‐

ume is set and press the knob.

Notes

Do not expose the audio device to extreme en‐

vironmental conditions, such as very high tem‐

peratures; refer to the audio device operating

instructions.

Depending on the configuration of the audio

files, e.g., bit rates greater than 256 kbit/s, the

files may not play back correctly in each case.

Information on connection

▷ It is only possible to connect one iPod/

iPhone to the vehicle at a time.

▷ Playback from the iPod/iPhone is only pos‐

sible via the USB audio interface if a snap-in

adapter is not used.

▷ The connected audio device is supplied

with a max. power of 500 mA if supported

by the device. Therefore, do not addition‐

ally connect the device to a socket in the

vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐

promised.

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐

nector into the USB interface.

▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB audio interface.

▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.

▷ Do not use the USB audio interface to re‐

charge external devices.

Seite 133

Radio MINI Boost CD

ENTERTAINMENT

133

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

CONNECT ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Telephone

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

At a glance

The concept

Mobile phones can be connected with the vehi‐

cle via Bluetooth.

After a suitable mobile phone is paired with the

vehicle once, you can operate the mobile

phone via the radio, the buttons on the steer‐

ing wheel, and via voice activation.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐

tooth® SIG, Inc.

Certain functions may need to be enabled by

the mobile phone provider or service provider.

Using the mobile phone while driving

Make entries only when traffic and road

conditions allow. Do not hold the mobile phone

in your hand while you are driving; use the

hands-free system instead. If you do not ob‐

serve this precaution, you can endanger the ve‐

hicle occupants and other road users.◀

Snap-in adapter

The snap-in adapter is used to:

▷ Hold the mobile phone.

▷ Recharge the battery.

▷ Connect the mobile phone to an outside

antenna of the vehicle.

This provides for better network reception

and consistent sound quality.

Do not operate a mobile phone that is con‐

nected to the vehicle on the mobile phone key‐

pad, as this may lead to a malfunction.

Approved mobile phones

Details on which mobile phones with a Blue‐

tooth interface are supported by the mobile

phone preparation package can be obtained at

www.mini.com/connectivity.

Notes

At high temperatures, the charging function of

the mobile phone may be limited and functions

may not be executed.

Controls

1 Display.

2 Function buttons for selecting the menu

items shown directly above them on the

display.

3 Redial, accept a call, start dialing, terminate

a call and change to the Telephone menu.

4 ▷ Turn: highlight the menu item on the

display or set the value.

Seite 136

COMMUNICATION

Telephone

136

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Press: select the highlighted menu item

or store the setting.

5 Opens the main menu.

6 On/off, volume control.

Menu navigation

Selecting menu items

There are two ways to select a menu item on

the display.

Using the right knob

▷ To mark a menu item: turn the right knob,

arrow 2.

▷ To select a menu item: press the right knob,

arrow 1.

Using the function buttons

Press the left or right side of the function

button under the menu item.

If only one menu item is displayed above the

function button, press the middle of the button.

Representation in the Owner's Manual

"…" Identifies radio display texts used to select

individual functions.

Symbols on the display

Symbol Meaning

Function is selected.

Leave the menu, one menu back.

Display additional menu items.

Scroll display. The list contains more

than two entries.

Reception of the wireless network:

the display depends on the signal

strength.

Using the hands-free system.

Roaming is active.

Pairing/unpairing the

mobile phone

Requirements

▷ The mobile phone is suitable, refer to

page 136.

▷ The mobile phone is ready for operation.

▷ Bluetooth is activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone.

▷ Bluetooth presettings may need to be

made on the mobile phone, e.g., for a con‐

nection without confirmation or visibility,

refer to the mobile phone operating in‐

structions.

▷ A number with at least four and a maxi‐

mum of 16 digits was defined as the Blue‐

tooth passkey. It is only required once for

pairing.

▷ The ignition is switched on.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply

with all safety guidelines and regulations.

Seite 137

Telephone

COMMUNICATION

137

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

To activate the connection:

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. "BT-ON"

To deactivate the connection again:

1. "BT"

2. "BT-OFF"

3. "YES"

Pairing and connecting

Pairing the mobile phone

To avoid becoming distracted and posing

an unnecessary hazard both to your own vehi‐

cle's occupants and to other road users, only

pair the mobile phone while the vehicle is sta‐

tionary.◀

Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. "BT"

5. "PAIR"

Turn the right knob to display the Bluetooth

name of your vehicle.

6. To perform additional steps on the mobile

phone, refer to the mobile phone operating

instructions: for instance, search for or con‐

nect the Bluetooth device or a new device.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears

on the mobile phone display.

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on

the mobile phone display.

You are prompted by the radio or mobile

phone to enter the same Bluetooth pass‐

key.

8. Enter the passkey on the mobile phone and

confirm it.

9. "ADD"

10. Enter the same passkey on the radio using

the function buttons and confirm it.

To delete the last digit: "DELETE"

11. "OK"

Press twice if necessary.

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone ap‐

pears on the radio display.

Four mobile phones can be paired with the ve‐

hicle at once.

If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐

fer to page 139.

Repeating the pairing procedure/help

If pairing failed:

"REPEAT"

2. Repeat steps 6 to 10.

To display the Customer Relations phone num‐

ber: "CALLS"

Turn the right knob to display the Customer Re‐

lations phone number and information needed

for pairing.

Following the initial pairing

▷ The mobile phone is detected/connected in

the vehicle within a short period of time

when the engine is running or the ignition

is switched on.

▷ The phone book entries of the telephone

stored on the SIM card or mobile phone are

transmitted to the vehicle after detection,

depending on the mobile phone.

▷ Specific settings may be necessary in some

mobile phones, e.g., authorization or a se‐

cure connection; refer to the mobile phone

operating instructions.

Seite 138

COMMUNICATION

Telephone

138

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Connecting a particular mobile phone

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. "BT"

5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone

to be connected is displayed.

6. "PRIO"

Press the button repeatedly until the de‐

sired position is reached.

Unpairing the mobile phone

Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. "BT"

5. Turn the right knob until the mobile phone

to be unpaired is displayed.

6. "DELETE"

7. "YES"

What to do if...

Information on suitable mobile phones, refer to

page 136.

The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐

nected.

▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on

the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth on

the vehicle and on the mobile phone.

▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile

phone and the vehicle match? Enter the

same passkey on the mobile phone and on

the radio.

▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter

the passkey? Repeat the pairing procedure.

▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices connected

to the mobile phone or vehicle? Delete con‐

nections with other devices if necessary.

▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or

does it have only a limited remaining bat‐

tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the

snap-in adapter or via the charging cable.

▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi‐

ble that only one mobile phone can be con‐

nected to the vehicle. Unpair the connected

mobile phone from the vehicle and pair

and connect only one mobile phone.

The mobile phone no longer reacts?

▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again.

▷ Is the ambient temperature too high or

low? Do not expose the mobile phone to

extreme environmental conditions.

No phone book entries or only some phone

book entries are displayed, or they are incom‐

plete.

▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is

not yet complete.

▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐

tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card

are transmitted.

▷ It may not be possible to display phone

book entries with special characters.

▷ The number of phone book entries to be

stored is too high.

▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,

e. g., due to stored information such as

notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐

tact.

The phone connection quality is poor.

▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the

mobile phone can be adjusted, depending

on the mobile phone.

▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in

adapter or place it in the area of the center

console.

▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and

loudspeakers.

Seite 139

Telephone

COMMUNICATION

139

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

If all points in this list have been checked and

the required function is still not available, con‐

tact Customer Relations or the service center.

Controls

▷ Accept/reject a call.

▷ Dial a phone number.

▷ Dial a phone number from the phone book.

▷ Dial a stored phone number, such as from

the list of accepted calls.

▷ End the call.

When the ignition and the radio ready state are

switched off, such as after the remote control is

removed, an existing call can be continued for

up to 25 minutes on the hands-free system.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the knob until the desired volume is se‐

lected. The setting is stored for the remote con‐

trol currently in use.

The ringer volume of incoming calls and the call

volume can be adjusted independently.

When a call is placed using the hands-free sys‐

tem, the audio sources are muted.

Switching the microphone to mute

When a call is active, the microphone can be

muted.

"MUTE"

A microphone that has been switched to mute

is automatically reactivated when a new con‐

nection is established.

Incoming call

Receiving calls

If the number of the caller is stored in the

phone book and is transmitted by the network,

the name of the contact is displayed. Other‐

wise, only the phone number is displayed.

Accepting a call

Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel or radio.

"YES"

Rejecting a call

"NO"

Ending a call

Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel or radio.

"END"

Entering a phone number

Dialing a number

Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. "#"

5. Enter the desired phone number on the

buttons 0–9.

Seite 140

COMMUNICATION

Telephone

140

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

To delete the last digit: "DEL"

Briefly press the button on the

steering wheel or radio.

Press the right knob to dial the phone num‐

ber.

Phone book

Dialed phone numbers, incoming calls and en‐

tries in the phone book are stored on lists if the

mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via

Bluetooth.

Five lists are available:

▷ "A-Z"

Entries of the phone book of the SIM card

or of the mobile phone, which consist of a

name and phone number, are sorted in al‐

phabetical order.

▷ "TOP8"

The Top 8 list contains the eight phone

numbers that were dialed most frequently.

▷ "LAST8"

The last eight phone numbers that were di‐

aled are stored. The phone number dialed

last is at the top of the list.

▷ "CALLS"

The phone numbers of the last eight ac‐

cepted calls are stored. For this to be possi‐

ble, it must be possible to transmit the

phone number of the caller.

▷ "MISSED"

The phone numbers of the last eight calls

that were not accepted are stored. For this

to be possible, it must be possible to trans‐

mit the phone number of the caller.

Dialing a phone number from the phone

book

The list A-Z is available for phone book entries.

If entries with different names but the same

phone number are transferred to the vehicle

from the mobile phone, only one entry is dis‐

played.

The display of the phone book entries on the

radio may differ from the display on the mobile

phone, such as the order of the first and last

names.

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. "A-Z"

5. The arrows indicate that additional

letters can be displayed.

Turn the right knob to display additional

letters if necessary.

6. Turn the right knob to select the first letter

of the entry.

7. Select the entry with the function button.

The phone number is dialed.

To display all entries:

Turn the right knob to select the first letter

of the entry and press the knob.

2. Turn the right knob to select the desired

entry and press the knob.

Press the button on the steering

wheel or radio to dial the number.

The phone number is dialed.

Editing and dialing a phone number

from the phone book

You can edit the phone number of an entry be‐

fore making a call. This change is not stored in

the phone book.

Selecting an entry.

2. "EDIT"

3. To delete a digit: "DEL"

Seite 141

Telephone

COMMUNICATION

141

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

4. Enter additional digits on the buttons 0–9.

5. Press the right knob to dial the phone num‐

ber.

Dialing a phone number from the phone

book using the buttons on the steering

wheel

Press and hold the button to dis‐

play the Telephone menu.

2. Press the arrow buttons on the steering

wheel to leaf through the phone book.

Press the button to dial the phone

number.

Dialing a phone number stored in a list

To select an entry and establish a connection:

Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "PHONE"

4. Select a list, for instance "TOP8"

5. Turn the right knob to select an entry and

press the knob to dial the phone number.

Deleting an individual entry

Select an entry from the list.

2. "DEL"

DTMF suffix dialing

DTMF suffix dialing can be used for gaining ac‐

cess to network services or for controlling devi‐

ces, e.g., to make a remote inquiry of an an‐

swering machine. The DTMF code is needed for

this purpose.

This function is only available if a connection

exists and if the hands-free system is being

used.

"KEYPAD"

2. Enter the DTMF code on the buttons 0–9.

3. If necessary, press and hold the function

button on the right or left to enter special

characters.

Displaying the call duration

During a call:

"DURAT"

Hands-free system

General information

Calls that are being made on the hands-free

system can be continued on the mobile phone

and vice versa.

From the mobile phone to the hands-

free system

Calls that were begun outside of the Bluetooth

range of the vehicle can be continued on the

hands-free system with the ignition switched

on.

Depending on the mobile phone, the system

automatically switches to the hands-free sys‐

tem.

If the system does not switch over automati‐

cally, follow the instructions on the mobile

phone display; refer also to the mobile phone

operating instructions.

From the hands-free system to the

mobile phone

Calls that are made on the hands-free system

can in some cases be continued on the mobile

phone; this depends on the mobile phone.

Follow the instructions on the mobile phone

display; refer also to the mobile phone operat‐

ing instructions.

MINI phone numbers

When the ignition is switched on, various serv‐

ice phone numbers can be displayed.

Seite 142

COMMUNICATION

Telephone

142

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ "Road Assist": Roadside Assistance, if help

is required in the event of a breakdown.

▷ "Serv. Appt.": MINI service center, if a serv‐

ice appointment needs to be arranged.

▷ "Cust Relat": Customer Relations, for infor‐

mation on all aspects of your vehicle.

Displaying the phone numbers

1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni‐

tion.

Press the button.

3. "MINI"

4. Turn the right knob until the desired phone

number is displayed.

Snap-in adapter

General information

More information on compatible snap-in

adapters that support the functions of the mo‐

bile phone is available at the service center.

Notes

At high temperatures, the charging function of

the mobile phone may be limited and functions

may not be executed.

When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,

note the operating instructions of the mobile

phone.

Installation position

In the center armrest.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter

1. Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the

cover, arrow 2.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front, ar‐

row 1, and press down, arrow 2, until it en‐

gages.

To remove:

To remove the snap-in adapter, press the but‐

ton.

Inserting the mobile phone

Depending on the mobile phone, remove

the protective cap from the antenna con‐

nector and from the USB connection of the

mobile phone.

2. With the buttons facing up, slide the mobile

phone up toward the electrical contacts, ar‐

Seite 143

Telephone

COMMUNICATION

143

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

row 1, and press it down until it engages,

arrow 2.

The battery is charged beginning with the radio

ready state of the vehicle.

Removing the mobile phone

Press the button, arrow 1, and remove the mo‐

bile phone, arrow 2.

Seite 144

COMMUNICATION

Telephone

144

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seite 145

Telephone

COMMUNICATION

145

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MOVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Refueling

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

General information

Refuel promptly

At the latest, refuel at a range below

30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the engine function

is not ensured and damage may occur.◀

Notes

Switch off the engine before refueling

Always switch off the engine before refu‐

eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to the

tank and a message will be displayed.◀

Observe when handling fuel

▷ Take all precautionary measures and

observe all applicable regulations

when handling fuel.

▷ Do not carry any spare fuel containers in

your vehicle. They can develop a leak and

cause an explosion or cause a fire in the

event of an accident.◀

Fuel cap

Opening

1. Open fuel filler flap.

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached

to the fuel filler flap.

Closing

Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.

2. Close the fuel filler flap.

Do not pinch the retaining strap

Do not pinch the retaining strap attached

to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed

properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

A message is displayed if the cap is loose or

missing.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of a malfunction, the fuel filler flap

can be released manually:

MINI Countryman:

Seite 148

MOBILITY

Refueling

148

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Paceman:

1. Open the cargo area trim, arrow.

2. Pull the green knob with the gas pump

symbol.

This opens the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following

when refueling

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐

pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel

pump nozzle during refueling causes:

▷ Premature pump shutoff.

▷ Reduced efficiency in the fuel-vapor recov‐

ery system.

The fuel tank is full after refueling is resumed

twice after the filler nozzle switches off for the

first time.

Do not overfill the fuel tank

Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise,

escaping fuel may harm the environment or

damage the vehicle.◀

Handling fuels

Follow the safety instructions provided at

gas stations; otherwise, there is a danger of

personal injury and property damage.◀

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 12.3 US gal/47 liters, including a re‐

serve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.

Seite 149

Refueling

MOBILITY

149

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Fuel

Fuel recommendation

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Gasoline

For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should

be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Do not use fuels that are labeled at the fuel

pump as containing metals.

Only refuel with lead-free gasoline with‐

out metal additives

Do not refuel with leaded gasoline or gasoline

with metal additives, e. g., manganese or iron;

otherwise, the catalytic converter and other

components will be permanently damaged.◀

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.

The ethanol should fulfill the following quality

standards:

US: ASTM 4806–xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: always adhere to the currently applicable

standard.

Do not refuel with ethanol E85

Do not refuel with E85, i.e., fuel with an

ethanol content of 85 %, or with Flex Fuel, as

this would damage the engine and fuel supply

system.◀

The engine is knock controlled. Therefore, you

can refuel with different recommended fuel

grades.

Recommended fuel grade

The manufacturer of your MINI recommends:

▷ AKI 91.

▷ John Cooper Works AKI 93.

Minimum fuel grade

The manufacturer of your MINI recommends

AKI 89.

Minimum fuel grade

Do not fill up with fuel below the speci‐

fied minimum quality; otherwise, the engine

may not run properly.◀

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat‐

ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds

when starting at high outside temperatures.

This has no effect on the engine life.

Minimum fuel grade

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in

harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐

ally, problems relating to drivability, starting

and stalling, especially under certain environ‐

mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐

perature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐

ommend switching to a high quality gasoline

brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐

ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐

gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐

chase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations

may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐

nance.◀

Seite 150

MOBILITY

Fuel

150

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seite 151

Fuel

MOBILITY

151

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Wheels and tires

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Tire inflation pressure

Safety information

It is not merely the tires' service life, but also

driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving

safety that depend on the condition of the tires

and the maintenance of the specified tire pres‐

sure.

Checking the pressure

Tires naturally lose pressure uniformly across all

four tires.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure

and correct it as needed: at least twice a month

and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this

precaution, you may be driving on tires with in‐

correct tire pressures, a condition that may not

only compromise your vehicle's driving stabil‐

ity, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of

an accident.

Do not drive with depressurized or flat tires, ex‐

cept for run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously

impair your vehicle's handling and braking re‐

sponse. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead

to a loss of control over the vehicle.◀

Tires warm up during driving and the tire infla‐

tion pressure increases as the temperature

rises. The tire inflation pressure specifications

apply to cold tires or tires at ambient tempera‐

ture.

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the

tires are cold. This means after a maximum of

1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle

has been parked for at least 2 hours. When the

tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is

higher.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset

the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 77

or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 74.

Pressure specifications

The tables below provide all the correct infla‐

tion pressures for the specified tire sizes at am‐

bient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes

approved and tire brands recommended by the

manufacturer of the MINI; a list of these is

available from the service center.

For correct identification of the right tire infla‐

tion pressures, observe the following:

▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle

▷ Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to

100 mph or 160 km/h

For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,

adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation

pressures listed on the following pages in the

column for traveling speeds up to 100 mph/

160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found

on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's

door is open.

Seite 152

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

152

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Do not exceed the maximum permissible

speed

The permissible maximum speed for these tire

inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h. Do

not exceed this speed or else there is a risk of

tire damage and accidents.◀

Tire inflation pressures for driving

above 100 mph or 160 km/h

Adjust the tire inflation pressures

To drive at maximum speeds in excess of

100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the re‐

spective tire inflation pressures listed on the

following pages in the column for traveling

speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or

160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and acci‐

dents could occur.◀

Observe all national and local maximum speed

limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could

occur.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in bar/PSI with cold

tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 V RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 207.

Seite 153

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

153

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman Cooper S/Countryman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in bar/PSI with cold

tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 V RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 207.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Countryman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in bar/PSI with cold

tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.6/38 2.6/38

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 207.

Seite 154

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

154

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in bar/PSI with cold

tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 V RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.4/35 2.4/35

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 208.

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman Cooper S / Paceman Cooper S ALL4

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in bar/PSI with cold

tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC

205/55 R 17 91 V RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.2/32 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.6/38

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 208.

Seite 155

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

155

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Tire inflation pressures for MINI Paceman John Cooper Works

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Traveling speeds of up to

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds above

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table

are indicated in bar/PSI with cold

tires.

Cold = ambient temperature

195/60 R 16 89 H M+S Std

225/45 R 18 91 V RSC

225/45 R 18 91 V M+S A/S RSC

225/40 R 19 89 V RSC

2.4/35 2.4/35 2.7/39 2.7/39

More details on the permissible load and weights, refer to page 208.

Tire identification marks

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the

tire makes it easier to identify and choose the

right tires.

Tire size

Example: 225/45 R 17 91 V

225: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

91: load rating, not for ZR tires

Speed letter

Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h

T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of

the U.S. Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

DOT xxxx xxx 2214

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

2214: tire age

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder

and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

Seite 156

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

156

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Conform to Federal Safety Requirements

All passenger car tires must conform to

Federal Safety Requirements in addition to

these grades.◀

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart significantly

from the norm due to variations in driving hab‐

its, service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop

on wet pavement as measured under control‐

led conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based

on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and

does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐

droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,

and C, representing the tire's resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions

on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐

terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire

life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to

a level of performance which all passenger car

tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐

cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the

laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐

quired by law.

Temperature grade for this tire

The temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and

not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐

tion, or excessive loading, either separately or

in combination, can cause heat buildup and

possible tire failure.◀

RSC – Run-flat tires

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle

with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to

page 160.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires.

These have better winter properties than

summer tires.

Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire tread

Summer tires

The tread depth should not be less than

0.12 in/3 mm, although European legislation,

for example, requires a minimum tread depth

of only 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths less

than 0.12 in/3 mm, there is a great danger of

hydroplaning even in low water depths and at

raised speeds.

Winter tires

The suitability of winter tires for winter driving

is reduced noticeably when their tread depth

becomes less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Seite 157

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

157

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Minimum tread depth

Wear indicators in the tread base are distrib‐

uted around the circumference of the tire and

are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread

Wear Indicator. When the tire tread has been

worn down to the wear indicators, a tread has

reached a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

Tire damage

General information

Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐

jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Notes

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,

as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can

cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐

pension parts. This is more likely to occur with

low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning

between the wheel and the road. Be careful to

avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐

pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-

profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐

fects:

▷ Unusual vibrations during driving.

▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

dency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can be caused by driving over curbs,

road damage and similar situations.

In case of tire damage

If there are indications of tire damage, re‐

duce your speed immediately and have the

wheels and tires checked right away; other‐

wise, there is the increased risk of an accident.

Drive carefully to the next service center or tire

shop.

If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

Otherwise, tire damage can present a life-

threatening hazard to vehicle occupants and

other road users.◀

Repair of tire damage

For safety reasons, the manufacturer of

your vehicle recommends that you do not have

damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐

placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐

sult.◀

Tire age

Recommendation

For several reasons, among other things be‐

cause of beginning brittleness, the manufac‐

turer of your MINI recommends mounting new

tires at the latest after six years, regardless of

the actual wear.

Manufacture date

The date of manufacture of the tires is specified

in the tire label:

DOT … 0315: the tire was manufactured in the

3rd week of 2015.

Seite 158

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

158

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Changing wheels and

tires

Mounting

Information on mounting tires

Have mounting and balancing performed

only by a service center or tire specialist.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is

the danger of subsequent damage and related

safety hazards.◀

Wheel and tire combination

Information on the right wheel and tire combi‐

nation and rim version for your vehicle can be

obtained from the service center.

Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair

the function of a variety of systems such as ABS

or DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐

sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐

figuration from a single manufacturer.

Following tire damage, have the original wheel

and tire combination remounted on the vehicle

as soon as possible.

Approved wheels and tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐

mends that you use only wheels and tires that

have been approved for your particular vehicle

model.

For example, despite having the same official

size ratings, variations can lead to body contact

and with it, the risk of severe accidents.

The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evalu‐

ate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐

mine if they are suited for use, and therefore

cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐

cle if they are mounted.◀

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire

Pressure Monitor

When mounting new tires or changing from

summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use

wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the

Tire Pressure Monitor will not be able to detect

a flat tire, refer to page 76. Your service center

will be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐

hicle recommends certain tire brands. These

are indicated by the clearly visible marking on

the tire sidewall.

With proper use, these tires meet the highest

standards for safety and handling.

Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐

ommend the use of retreaded tires.

Retreaded tires

Possibly substantial variations in the de‐

sign and age of the tire casing structures can

limit service life and have a negative impact on

road safety.◀

Winter tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends

winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures

below +45 ℉/+7 ℃.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires do pro‐

vide better winter traction than summer tires,

they do not provide the same level of perform‐

ance as winter tires.

Seite 159

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

159

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher

than the permissible speed for the winter tires,

then display a corresponding sign in the field of

vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire

specialist or from your service center.

Maximum speed for winter tires

Do not exceed the maximum speed for

the winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and ac‐

cidents can occur.◀

Run-flat tires

When mounting new tires or changing from

summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-

flat tires for your own safety. Also, a compact

wheel is not available in case of a flat tire. Your

service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns occur on the front and

rear axles, depending on the individual condi‐

tions of use.

To ensure even wear on the tires, the wheels

can be rotated between the axles. Your service

center will be glad to advise you.

After changing the tires, check the tire inflation

pressure and correct it if necessary.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with

as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil,

grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐

sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Run-flat tires

Label

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle

with the letters RSC on the sidewall.

Run-flat tires are tires that support themselves

for a limited period of time, and they may also

come with special rims. The sidewall reinforce‐

ment ensures that the tire can continue to be

used to a limited extent if it has lost pressure

and even if it has become completely depres‐

surized.

For continued driving in the event of a flat tire,

refer to page 75.

Correcting a flat tire

Safety measures in case of a breakdown

▷ Park the vehicle as far as possible

from passing traffic and on solid

ground. Switch on the hazard warn‐

ing system.

▷ Let the steering wheel lock engage with the

wheels in the straight-ahead position, set

the parking brake, and engage first gear or

reverse, or engage selector lever position P.

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐

side the immediate area in a safe place,

such as behind a guardrail.

Seite 160

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

160

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ If a warning triangle or portable hazard

warning lamp is required, set it up on the

roadside at an appropriate distance from

the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all

safety guidelines and regulations.◀

The procedure to correct a flat tire depends on

the equipment in the vehicle:

▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 160.

▷ MINI Mobility System, refer to page 161.

MINI Mobility System

Notes

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐

lity System found on the compressor and

sealant bottle.

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐

tive if tire damage is greater than approx.

1/8 in/4 mm in size.

▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire

cannot be made drivable.

▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies

that have penetrated the tire.

▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant

bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.

Sealant and compressor

1 Sealant bottle and speed limit sticker

2 Filling hose

Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.

3 Holder for the sealant bottle

4 Compressor

5 Connector and cable for the lighter socket/

socket in passenger compartment 99.

6 Connection hose for connecting the com‐

pressor and sealant bottle or the compres‐

sor and wheel

7 On/off switch

8 Pressure gauge for displaying the tire infla‐

tion pressure

9 Release button for reducing the tire infla‐

tion pressure

The connector, cable, and connecting hose are

stowed in the compressor housing.

Using the Mobility System

To repair a flat tire with the Mobility System,

proceed as follows:

▷ Filling the tire with sealant

▷ Distributing the sealant

▷ Correcting the tire inflation pressure

Filling the tire with sealant

Adhere to the specified sequence

Adhere to the specified sequence of the

steps; otherwise, sealant may escape under

high pressure.◀

Shake the sealant bottle.

2. Pull the connection hose 6 fully out of the

compressor housing and screw it onto the

sealant bottle connection. Ensure that the

connection hose is not kinked.

Seite 161

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

161

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres‐

sor housing in a vertical position.

4. Unscrew the dust cap off of the valve of the

defective wheel and screw the filling hose 2

of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Ensure that the compressor is switched off.

6. Insert connector 5 into the lighter socket/

socket in the passenger compartment, refer

to page 99.

7. When the engine is running:

Switch on the compressor and let it run for

approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill sealant into

the tire and achieve a tire inflation pressure

of approx. 1.8 bar/26 psi.

While sealant is being filled, the inflation

pressure may intermittently rise to approx.

5 bar/73 psi. Do not switch off the com‐

pressor in this phase.

8. Switch off the compressor.

Do not allow the compressor to run too

long

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than

10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat

and may be damaged.◀

If an air pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is not

reached:

Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel

and drive forward and back approx.

33 ft/10 m to evenly distribute the sealant

in the tire.

2. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.

If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still

not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.

Contact the nearest service center.

Stowing the Mobility System

1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle from the wheel.

2. Unscrew the compressor connection hose 6

from the sealant bottle.

3. Connect the filling hose 2 of the sealant

bottle with the free connector on the seal‐

ant bottle.

This prevents left-over sealant from escap‐

ing from the bottle.

4. Wrap the empty sealant bottle in suitable

material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.

5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐

cle.

Distributing the sealant

Drive approx. 3.1 miles/5 km to evenly distrib‐

ute the sealant.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If

possible, do not drop below a speed of

10 mph/20 km/h.

Correcting the tire inflation pressure

After driving approx. 3.1 miles/5 km, or

about 10 minutes, stop in a suitable loca‐

tion.

2. Screw the connection hose 6 of the com‐

pressor directly onto the tire valve.

3. Insert the connector 5 into the power

socket in the passenger compartment.

4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to

1.8 bar/26 psi. When the engine is running:

▷ To increase the inflation pressure:

switch on the compressor. To check the

currently set inflation pressure, switch

off the compressor.

▷ To reduce the inflation pressure: press

the release button 9.

Seite 162

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

162

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Do not allow the compressor to run too

long

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than

10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat

and may be damaged.◀

If the inflation pressure is not maintained, take

the vehicle on another drive, distributing the

sealant, refer to page 162. Then repeat steps

1 to 4 once.

If the inflation pressure of 1.8 bar/26 psi is still

not reached, the tire is too heavily damaged.

Contact the nearest service center.

Continuing the trip

Note the maximum speed

Do not exceed the maximum speed of

50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, accidents can oc‐

cur.◀

Replace the defective tire as soon as possible

and have the wheel balanced.

Have the Mobility System refilled.

Snow chains

Only certain fine-link snow chains have been

tested by MINI, classified as safe for use, and

recommended. Consult your service center for

more information.

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped

with tires of the following size:

195/60 R 16 M+S

With ALL4 all-wheel drive: only mount snow

chains on the front wheels.

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when

mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed

of 30 mph or 50 km/h when using snow chains.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow

chains are mounted; otherwise, the instrument

might issue an incorrect reading.

Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor if

snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the in‐

strument might issue an incorrect reading.

When driving with snow chains, it may be use‐

ful to temporarily deactivate DSC or activate

DTC, refer to page 81.

Seite 163

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

163

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Engine compartment

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number

2 Battery, under the cover 179

3 Dip stick for engine oil 166

4 Engine oil filler neck 166

5 Coolant expansion tank 168

6 Engine compartment fuse box 179

7 Reservoir for washer fluid for the headlight

and window washer system 54

Seite 164

MOBILITY

Engine compartment

164

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Hood

Notes

Working in the engine compartment

Never attempt to perform any service or

repair operations on your vehicle without the

necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐

lines, have any work on the vehicle performed

only by a service center.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is

the danger of subsequent damage and related

safety hazards.◀

To avoid damage, make sure that the

wiper arms are resting against the wind‐

shield before you open the engine compart‐

ment. Do not open the engine hood before the

engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries

may result.◀

Unlocking and opening the hood

Pull the lever.

2. Lift the hood all the way.

3. Press the release handle and open the

hood.

Danger of injury when the hood is open

There is a danger of injury from protrud‐

ing parts when the hood is open.◀

Closing the hood

Close the hood from a height of ap‐

prox. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be

clearly heard to engage.

Hood open when driving

If you see any signs that the hood is not

completely closed while driving, pull over im‐

mediately and close it securely.◀

Danger of pinching

Make sure that the closing path of the

hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

Seite 165

Engine compartment

MOBILITY

165

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Engine oil

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

General information

Engine oil consumption depends on the driving

style and the conditions of use. A highly sporty

driving style, for example, results in considera‐

bly higher engine oil consumption.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level

after refueling.

Checking the oil level with a dip stick

Park the vehicle on level ground when the

engine is at operating temperature, i.e., af‐

ter driving continuously for at least

6 2 miles/10 km.

2. Switch the engine off.

3. After approx. 5 minutes, pull out the dip

stick and wipe it off with a lint-free cloth,

paper towel, etc.

4. Carefully insert the dip stick all the way into

the measuring tube and pull it out again.

The oil level must be between the two

marks on the dip stick.

The oil quantity between the two marks on the

dip stick equals approx. 1 US quart/1 liter.

Do not exceed the high mark.

Do not exceed the high mark of the dip

stick. Overfilling oil damages the engine.◀

Adding engine oil

Filler neck

Add a maximum quantity of 1 US quart/1 liter

of oil only after the corresponding message ap‐

pears on the Control Display or, in diesel en‐

gines, after the oil level is just above the low

mark of the dip stick, refer to page 166.

Add oil promptly

Add oil within the next 30 miles/50 km;

otherwise, engine damage could result.◀

Seite 166

MOBILITY

Engine oil

166

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Too much engine oil

Have the vehicle checked immediately;

otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐

age.◀

Protect children

Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐

dren and heed the warnings on the containers

to prevent health risks.◀

Oil types for refilling

Notes

No oil additives

Do not use oil additives as these may

cause engine damage.◀

Viscosity classes of engine oils

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that

the engine oil belongs to one of the SAE viscos‐

ity classes 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40, or 5W-30, or

malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the

engine.

Approved oil types

Gasoline engine

BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Further information on approved oil types can

be obtained from the service center.

Alternative oil types

If the approved engine oils are not available, up

to 1 US quart/1 liter of an oil with the following

specification can be used:

Gasoline engine

API SM or a higher quality standard

Engine oil change

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends

having the engine oil changed by a service cen‐

ter.

Seite 167

Engine oil

MOBILITY

167

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Coolant

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

General information

Danger of burns from hot engine

Do not open the cooling system while the

engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may

cause burns.◀

Suitable additives

Only use suitable additives; otherwise,

engine damage may occur. The additives are

harmful to your health.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are

suitable for your MINI vehicle. Ask your service

center for suitable additives.

Coolant temperature

If the coolant and therefore the engine over‐

heat, a warning lamp lights up, refer to

page 191.

Coolant level

Checking

1. Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.

2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐

wise slightly to allow any accumulated

pressure to escape; then continue turning

to open.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between

the markings. The markings are located on

the side of the coolant reservoir.

Refilling

Do not open the hood until the engine has

cooled down.

2. Turn the expansion tank cap counterclock‐

wise slightly to allow any accumulated

pressure to escape, then continue turning

to open.

3. If the coolant level is low, slowly add cool‐

ant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

4. Twist the cap closed.

5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐

nated as soon as possible.

Disposal

Comply with the appropriate environ‐

mental protection regulations when dis‐

posing of coolant additives.

Seite 168

MOBILITY

Coolant

168

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Maintenance

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

MINI maintenance system

The MINI maintenance system provides infor‐

mation on required maintenance measures and

thus provides support in maintaining road

safety and the operational reliability of the ve‐

hicle.

Condition Based Service

CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐

count the various driving conditions of your

MINI. Based on this, Condition Based Service

determines the current and future mainte‐

nance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt the

amount of maintenance you need to your user

profile.

Detailed information on service requirements

can be displayed in the tachometer, refer to

page 63.

Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is

continuously stored in the remote control. Your

service center will read out this data and sug‐

gest the right array of service procedures for

your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service spe‐

cialist the remote control that you used most

recently.

Setting the correct date

Make sure the date is set correctly; other‐

wise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based

Service is not ensured.◀

Service and Warranty In‐

formation Booklet for

US models and Warranty

and Service Guide Book‐

let for Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐

mation Booklet for US models and Warranty

and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

for additional information on service require‐

ments.

Maintenance and repair should be performed

by your service center. Make sure to have regu‐

lar maintenance procedures recorded in the ve‐

hicle's Service and Warranty Information Book‐

let for US models, and in the Warranty and

Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

These entries are proof of regular maintenance.

Seite 169

Maintenance

MOBILITY

169

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis

The socket for Onboard Diagnosis may

only be used by the service center, by work‐

shops that operate according to the specifica‐

tions of the vehicle manufacturer with appro‐

priately trained personnel, and by other

authorized persons. Otherwise, its use may

lead to vehicle malfunctions.◀

Primary components in the vehicle emissions

can be checked via the OBD socket using a de‐

vice.

Emissions

The warning lamps light up. The vehicle

is producing higher emissions. You can

continue your journey, but moderate

your speed and exercise due caution. Have the

vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Under certain circumstances, one of the lamps

flashes or lights up continuously. This indicates

that there is excessive misfiring or a malfunc‐

tion in the engine. If this happens, reduce the

vehicle speed and drive to the next service cen‐

ter promptly. Serious engine misfiring within a

brief period can seriously damage emission

control components, in particular the catalytic

converter. In addition, the mechanical engine

components may become damaged.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight‐

ened, the OBD system may conclude

that fuel vapor is escaping; this will cause a dis‐

play to light up. If the filler cap is then tight‐

ened, the display should go out in a few days.

Seite 170

MOBILITY

Maintenance

170

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Replacing components

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Wiper blade replacement

General information

Do not fold down the wipers without

wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades

have not been installed; this may damage the

windshield.◀

Replacing the front wiper blades

Fold up and hold the wiper arm.

2. Squeeze the locking spring, arrows 1, and

fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.

3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch

mechanism toward the front.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation

until it engages audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Risk of damage

Before opening the hood, ensure that the

wiper arms with wiper blades are folded onto

the window; otherwise, damage may occur.◀

Changing the rear wiper blade

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Fold up and hold the wiper arm.

2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back, ar‐

row.

3. Press the wiper blade against the stop to

push it out of the fixation.

4. Press the new wiper blade into the fixation

until it engages audibly.

5. Fold down the wiper arm.

Seite 171

Replacing components

MOBILITY

171

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Lamp and bulb replace‐

ment

Notes

Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐

tion to vehicle safety. Therefore, exercise cau‐

tion when handling lights and bulbs.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends

that you entrust corresponding procedures to

the service center if you are unfamiliar with

them or they are not described here.

You can obtain a selection of replacement

bulbs at the service center.

Danger of burns

Only change bulbs when they are cool;

otherwise, there is the danger of getting

burned.◀

Working on the lighting system

When working on the lighting system,

you should always switch off the lights affected

to prevent short circuits.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damage

when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions

provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not touch the bulbs

Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with

your bare hands, as even minute amounts of

contamination will burn into the bulb's surface

and reduce its service life.

Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,

or hold the bulb by its base.◀

Caring for the headlights, refer to page 187.

For bulb replacement that is not described

here, please contact the service center or a

workshop that works according to the repair

procedures of the manufacturer with corre‐

spondingly trained personnel.

For checking and adjusting headlight aim,

please contact your MINI dealer.

Light-emitting diodes LEDs

In some equipment, the light source is provided

by light-emitting diodes behind a cover.

These light-emitting diodes, which operate us‐

ing a concept similar to that applied in conven‐

tional lasers, are designated as Class 1 light-

emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers

Do not remove the covers, and never

stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;

otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀

Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the

headlights in cool or humid weather. When the

light is switched on, the condensation evapo‐

rates after a short time. The headlights do not

need to be changed.

If the condensation in the headlights does not

evaporate after trips with the lights switched

on, and the amount of moisture in the head‐

lights increases, for example if water droplets

form, have them checked by your service cen‐

ter.

Bi-xenon headlights

These bulbs have a very long life and the likeli‐

hood of failure is very low, provided that they

are not switched on and off excessively. If a

bulb should nevertheless fail, you can continue

driving cautiously with the front fog lights, pro‐

vided this is permitted by local laws.

Do not perform work/bulb replacement

on xenon headlamps

Have any work on the xenon lighting system,

including bulb replacement, performed only by

a service center.

Due to the high voltage present in the system,

there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is

carried out improperly.◀

Seite 172

MOBILITY

Replacing components

172

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Front lights, bulb replacement

At a glance

Headlights

1 Low beams/high-beams

2 Turn signal

Lower front lights

1 Parking lights

2 Daytime running lights or fog lights

Lower LED front lights

1 Parking lights / daytime running lights

2 Fog lights

Halogen low beams and high-beams

H13 bulb, 60/55 watt

Wear protective goggles and gloves

Halogen bulbs are pressurized. Therefore,

wear protective goggles and gloves. Otherwise,

there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is acci‐

dentally damaged during replacement.◀

Attach the cover carefully

When attaching the cover, proceed care‐

fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐

age to the headlamp system.◀

Access to the bulbs through the engine

compartment

Follow the general instructions on lamps and

bulbs, refer to page 172.

Low beam/high-beam bulbs can be changed

from the engine compartment.

Seite 173

Replacing components

MOBILITY

173

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

To remove the cover:

1. Press the tab.

2. Fold away the cover and take it out of the

holder.

Proceed in reverse order to attach the cover.

Attach the cover carefully

When attaching the cover, proceed care‐

fully; otherwise, leaks may occur, causing dam‐

age to the headlamp system.◀

Replacing the bulb

Turn the bulb counterclockwise, arrow 1,

and remove it, arrow 2.

2. Press the release, arrow 1, and pull off the

connector, arrow 2.

3. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

reverse order.

LED parking lights/LED fog lights/LED

daytime running lights

Follow the general instructions on lamps and

bulbs, refer to page 172.

Lights are implemented using LED technology.

Contact your service center in the event of a

malfunction.

Turn signals/parking lights/roadside

parking lights/fog lights/and daytime

running lights

Access to the bulbs via the wheel housing

Follow the general instructions on lamps and

bulbs, refer to page 172.

1 Turn signal

2 Parking lights/roadside parking lights/fog

lights/and daytime running lights

Replacing the turn signal bulb

21-watt bulb, P 21 W, or PY 21 W

Turn the wheel.

2. Remove cover 1.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.

Seite 174

MOBILITY

Replacing components

174

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

3. Remove the inside cover. To do this, turn

the cover counterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐

move it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the covers

in reverse order.

Replacing the parking light bulb and

roadside parking light bulb

5-watt bulb, W 5 W

Turn the wheel.

2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Turn the upper bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

reverse order.

Replacing the front fog light bulb

H8 bulb, 35 watt

Turn the wheel.

2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.

4. Turn the lower bulb counterclockwise and

remove it.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

reverse order.

Replacing the daytime running light bulb

Bulb PSX24W

Turn the wheel.

2. Remove cover 2.

To do this, turn the cover counterclockwise.

3. Pull off the plug-in cable connector.

Seite 175

Replacing components

MOBILITY

175

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

4. Squeeze the lower bulb at both tabs and

pull out.

5. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

reverse order.

Lateral turn signals

5-watt bulb, W 5 W

Open the hood.

2. Squeeze the clip, arrows, and remove the

bulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it to the left

and replace it.

4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in

reverse order.

Side marker lights

To replace these bulbs, contact the service cen‐

ter.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on lamps and

bulbs, refer to page 172.

Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, PY 21 W

MINI Countryman

1 Brake/tail light

2 Turn signal

3 Brake/tail light

4 Backup light

MINI Paceman

1 Brake light

2 Tail light

3 Turn signal

4 Backup light

Replacing

All bulbs are integrated in a central bulb holder.

MINI Countryman

Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.

2. Open the tailgate.

Seite 176

MOBILITY

Replacing components

176

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

3. Press the cover out of the cargo area side

panel at the rear and remove it.

4. Detach the emergency release of the fuel

filler flap, refer to page 148, and push it

aside with the foam insert.

Ensure that the emergency release is not

damaged.

5. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing

down the clip, arrow 1.

6. Take out the bulb holder and detach the

cable, arrow 2.

7. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while

turning it to the left and remove it.

8. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb

holder in reverse order. Ensure that the

bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

9. Return the foam insert to its original posi‐

tion and reattach the emergency release of

the fuel filler flap.

10. Reattach the cover.

MINI Paceman

1. Switch off the lights and take the remote

control out of the ignition lock.

2. Open the tailgate.

3. Remove the cover from the cargo area side

trim.

4. Unlock the fastening elements, arrows 1, by

turning.

5. Remove the screws, arrows 2, using the hex

key from the vehicle document portfolio.

6. Remove the tail light.

7. Disengage the bulb holder by pushing

down the clip, arrows 1.

8. Take out the bulb holder and detach the

cable, arrow 2.

Seite 177

Replacing components

MOBILITY

177

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

9. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while

turning it to the left and remove it.

10. Insert the new bulb and mount the bulb

holder in reverse order. Ensure that the

bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

License plate lights

5-watt bulb, C 5 W

Replacing

MINI Countryman

1. Push the light to the left in the catch of the

light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐

row 1.

2. Take out the light, arrow 2.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the light.

MINI Paceman

Push the light to the left in the catch of the

light housing using the screwdriver, ar‐

row 1.

2. Take out the light, arrow 2.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Insert the light.

Center brake light

This light uses LED technology for operation. In

case of a defect, please contact your service

center or a workshop that works according to

the repair procedures of the manufacturer of

your MINI with correspondingly trained person‐

nel.

Changing wheels

Notes

The vehicle may be equipped with conven‐

tional tires with the Mobility System, refer to

page 161, or with run-flat tires, refer to

page 160.

No spare tire is available in the case of a flat

tire.

Suitable tools for changing the wheels are

available from the service center as an acces‐

sory.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Seite 178

MOBILITY

Replacing components

178

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐

cated in the positions shown.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the elec‐

trolyte will last for the life of the battery in tem‐

perate climate conditions.

The service center will be happy to answer any

questions on the battery.

Battery replacement

Use approved vehicle batteries

Only use vehicle batteries that have been

approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer;

otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and

systems or functions may not be fully availa‐

ble.◀

Have the vehicle battery registered by the serv‐

ice center after it is replaced to ensure that all

comfort functions are available without restric‐

tions and that any associated Check Control

messages are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

Note

Do not connect the charger to the socket

Do not connect the battery charger to the

socket installed in the vehicle at the factory as

this could damage the battery.◀

Only charge the battery in the vehicle when the

engine is switched off. Connections, refer to

page 181.

General information

Ensure that the battery is sufficiently charged to

achieve the full battery life.

It may be necessary to charge the battery in

the following cases:

▷ When the vehicle is frequently used to

travel short distances.

▷ When the vehicle has not been driven for

more than one month.

Power failure

After a temporary power failure, some equip‐

ment will be restricted in its use and will need

to be reinitialized. In addition, certain individual

settings will be lost and must be updated:

▷ Time and date: the values must be up‐

dated, refer to page 62.

▷ Radio: the stations need to be stored again,

refer to page 126.

▷ Glass sunroof, electrical: it may only be pos‐

sible to tilt the roof. The system needs to be

initialized. Contact the service center.

Disposing of old batteries

Have used batteries disposed of by the

service center after they are replaced or

take them to a recycling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for

transport and storage. Secure the battery so

that it does not tip over during transport.

Fuses

Replacing fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and

do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐

tute of another color or amperage rating; this

Seite 179

Replacing components

MOBILITY

179

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐

sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀

Fuses should be replaced by the service center.

Information on the fuses can be found on the

inside of the covers.

In the engine compartment

Opening the cover

Press the snap lock.

In interior

On the right side of the footwell.

Opening the cover

Push out at the recess.

Seite 180

MOBILITY

Replacing components

180

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Hazard warning flash‐

ers

The button is located on the speedometer.

Warning triangle

Under the loading edge in the cargo area.

To remove, open the two fasteners.

First aid kit

Some of the articles contained in the first aid kit

have a limited service life. Therefore, check the

use-by dates of the contents regularly and re‐

place the items before they expire.

The first aid kit is located in the left side trim on

the cargo area floor or under the loading floor.

Roadside Assistance

Service availability

Roadside Assistance can be reached around the

clock in many countries. You can obtain assis‐

tance there in the event of a vehicle break‐

down.

Roadside Assistance

A phone number for Roadside Assistance can

be displayed, refer to page 142, via the radio.

Jump-starting

Notes

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be

started using the battery of another vehicle and

Seite 181

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

181

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

two jumper cables. In the same way, you can

help jump-start another vehicle. Only use

jumper cables with fully insulated clamp han‐

dles.

To prevent personal injury or damage to both

vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐

dure.

Do not touch live parts

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,

always avoid all contact with electrical compo‐

nents while the engine is running.◀

Preparation

Check whether the battery of the other ve‐

hicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approxi‐

mately the same capacitance in Ah. This in‐

formation can be found on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐

cle.

3. Switch off any electronic systems/power

consumers in both vehicles.

Bodywork contact between vehicles

There must not be any contact between

the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise there

is a danger of shorting.◀

Connecting jumper cables

Connecting order

Connect the jumper cables in the correct

order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury

from sparking.◀

1. Open the battery cover in the engine com‐

partment to access the positive terminal.

2. Unlock the tabs of the positive terminal

cover on the left and right, arrows 1, and

raise the cover, arrow 2.

3. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the

battery or to a starting aid terminal of the

vehicle providing assistance.

4. Attach the second clamp of the positive

jumper cable to the positive terminal of the

battery of the vehicle to be started.

5. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative

jumper cable to the negative terminal of

the battery, or to the corresponding engine

or body ground of the vehicle providing as‐

sistance.

6. Attach the second clamp of the negative

jumper cable to the negative terminal of

Seite 182

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

182

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

the battery, or to the engine or body

ground of the vehicle to be started.

Body ground:

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

let it run for several minutes at a slightly in‐

creased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started

in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not successful,

wait a few minutes before making another

attempt in order to allow the discharged

battery to recharge.

3. Let both engines run for several minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse

order.

Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Tow-starting and towing

Notes

Observe applicable laws and regulations

for tow-starting and towing.◀

No additional passengers

Do not transport any passengers other

than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.◀

Using a tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried

in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front

or rear of the MINI.

The tow fitting is stowed in the following loca‐

tion, depending on the equipment:

▷ Under the right or left front seat.

▷ In the pouch of the wheel change set in the

cargo area.

Tow fitting, information on use

▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with

the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved

roads only.

▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,

do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.

Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the

vehicle can occur.◀

Access to the screw thread

Push out the tow fitting cover at the appropri‐

ate recess in the bumper.

Front

Seite 183

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

183

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Rear

Being towed

Follow the towing instructions

Follow all towing instructions, or vehicle

damage or accidents may occur.◀

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;

otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn

signals, and windshield wipers may be un‐

available.

▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle

tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no

power assist. Consequently, more force

needs to be applied when braking and

steering.

▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐

quired.

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐

pending on local regulations.

Manual transmission

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Steptronic transmission

Towing vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐

mission

Only transport vehicles with a Steptronic trans‐

mission on tow trucks or with raised front

wheels; otherwise, the transmission may be

damaged.◀

Towing with a tow bar

Light towing vehicle

The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than your vehicle, or it will not be possible to

control vehicle response.◀

Correctly attach the tow bar

Only secure the tow bar on the tow fit‐

tings; damage can occur when it is secured on

other parts of the vehicle.◀

The tow fittings used should be on the same

side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting

the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe

the following:

▷ Clearance and maneuvering capability will

be sharply limited during cornering.

▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it

is attached offset.

Towing with a tow rope

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure

that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on

the vehicle components when towing, always

use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Attaching the tow rope correctly

Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐

ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is

secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀

With a tow truck: vehicles without ALL4

all-wheel drive

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.◀

Seite 184

MOBILITY

Breakdown assistance

184

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Have the vehicle transported with a tow truck

with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

With a tow truck: vehicle with ALL4 all-

wheel drive

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or

body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.◀

Note for vehicles with ALL4 all-wheel

drive

Do not tow a vehicle with ALL4 all-wheel drive

with just the front or rear axle raised; other‐

wise, the wheels could lock up and the transfer

case could be damaged.◀

MINI Countryman:

MINI Paceman:

Only transport the vehicle on a flat-bed.

Tow-starting

If possible, start the engine by jump-starting,

refer to page 181, it rather than tow-starting

the vehicle. Vehicles with a catalytic converter

should only be tow-started when the engine is

cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission

cannot be tow-started.

Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 48.

3. Engage third gear.

4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the

clutch is depressed and then slowly release

the clutch. After the engine starts, immedi‐

ately depress the clutch completely again.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow

bar or rope, and switch off the hazard

warning system.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Seite 185

Breakdown assistance

MOBILITY

185

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Care

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Car washes

Notes

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

When using steam jets or high-pressure

washers, hold them a sufficient distance away

and use a maximum temperature of

140 ℉/60 ℃.

Holding them too close or using excessively

high pressures or temperatures can cause dam‐

age or preliminary damage that may then lead

to long-term damage.

Follow the operating instructions for the high-

pressure washer.◀

Do not direct steam or high-pressure washers

toward the labels applied by the manufacturer;

otherwise, damage may result.

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pres‐

sure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not

spray the seals of the retractable hardtop and

the exterior sensors and cameras, for Park Dis‐

tance Control, for instance, for extended peri‐

ods of time and only from a distance of at least

12 in/30 cm.◀

During the winter months

Ensure that the vehicle is washed more

frequently in winter. Intense soiling and road

salt can damage the vehicle.◀

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes

briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action

can be reduced and corrosion of the brake

discs can occur.

Regularly remove foreign bodies, such as

leaves, from the area of the windshield when

the hood is open.

Washing in automatic car washes

Give preference to cloth car washes or those

that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint

damage.

Do not use automatic high-pressure washers;

otherwise, water may drip into the interior in

the area of the windows.

Before driving into the car wash, check whether

the system is suitable for your MINI. Note the

following points:

▷ Vehicle dimensions, refer to page 206.

▷ If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors, re‐

fer to page 40.

▷ Maximum permissible tire width.

Guide rails in car washes

Avoid car washes with guide rails higher

than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle chassis

could be damaged.◀

Preparations before driving into the car wash:

▷ Unscrew the road antenna.

▷ Deactivate the rain sensor to avoid unin‐

tentional wiper activation.

▷ Deactivate the rear window wiper and pro‐

tect it from damage. Ask the car wash oper‐

ator about any necessary protective meas‐

ures.

Seite 186

MOBILITY

Care

186

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

▷ Remove additional attachments, for in‐

stance a spoiler or telephone antenna, if

there is a risk that these may be damaged.

▷ Insert the remote control into the ignition

lock.

Steptronic transmission

Before driving into the car wash, note the fol‐

lowing to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition

lock, even with Comfort Access.

2. Move the selector lever to position N.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Switch the engine off.

5. Leave the remote control in the ignition

lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Hand car wash

If washing the vehicle by hand, use copious

quantities of water and car shampoo if neces‐

sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or a

washing brush by applying gentle pressure.

Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the

rain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activa‐

tion or switch off the ignition.

Adhere to the local regulations regarding

washing cars by hand.

Headlights

Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caus‐

tic cleansers. Soak areas that have been soiled,

e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and rinse off

with copious quantities of water.

Thaw ice with a window deicer; do not use an

ice scraper.

Windows

Clean the outside and inside surfaces of the

windows and the mirror glasses with window

cleaner.

Do not clean mirror glass with cleaners contain‐

ing quartz.

Wiper blades

Clean with soapy water and replace regularly to

avoid streaking.

Wax and preservative residue and soiling on

the windows cause streaking during window

wiping and lead to premature wear on the

wiper blades and malfunctions of the rain sen‐

sor.

Vehicle care

Car care products

Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi‐

cantly to vehicle value retention.

The manufacturer recommends using cleaning

and care products from MINI, since these have

been tested and approved.

Original MINI CareProducts have been tested

on materials, in the laboratory, and in the field,

and offer optimum care and protection for MINI

vehicles.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol

or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or

solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead

to surface damage.◀

Car care and cleaning products

Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or

windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐

cles.

Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐

gerous and harmful to your health.◀

Seite 187

Care

MOBILITY

187

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Vehicle paint

Regular care contributes to vehicle value reten‐

tion and protects the paintwork against the

long-term effects of paint-damaging substan‐

ces.

Environmental influences in areas with higher

air pollution or natural contaminants, such as

tree resin or pollen, can have an impact on the

vehicle paint. Therefore, it is important to tailor

the frequency and extent of your car care to

these influences.

Immediately remove especially aggressive sub‐

stances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, or bird

droppings, to prevent damage to the paint‐

work.

Correcting paint damage

Depending on the severity of the damage, re‐

pair stone impact damage or scratches imme‐

diately to prevent rust formation.

The manufacturer recommends having paint

damage corrected with a professional repair

paint job according to factory specifications us‐

ing original MINI paint materials.

Preservation

Preservation is needed when water no longer

beads off of the clean paint surfaces. Only use

paint preservation products that contain car‐

nauba or synthetic waxes.

Caring for matte finishes

▷ Do not use paint cleaners or gloss protec‐

tion agents such as car wax.

▷ Do not polish the surface or use abrasive

products, as these may cause the finish to

become glossy.

Leather care

The leather processed by the manufacturer is a

high quality natural product. Light graininess is

a typical feature of natural leather.

Particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores

and folds, and lead to increased wear and pre‐

mature degradation of the leather surface.

Therefore, remove dust from the leather regu‐

larly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Make especially sure that light-colored leather

is cleaned regularly as it is more susceptible to

soiling.

Twice a year, treat the leather with a leather lo‐

tion as dirt and grease will attack the protective

layer of the leather.

Upholstery material care

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to re‐

move superficial soiling.

In case of heavy soiling, e.g., beverage stains,

use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth in

combination with a suitable interior cleaner.

Follow the instructions on the container.

Clean the upholstery material down to the

seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid

rubbing the material vigorously.

Damage from Velcro® fasteners

Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other

articles of clothing can damage the seat covers.

Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀

Caring for special components

Interior plastic parts

These include:

▷ Imitation leather surfaces

▷ Lamp lenses

▷ Indicator covers

▷ Matte components

Clean with water and a solvent-free plastic

cleaner if necessary.

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol

or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or

solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty

Seite 188

MOBILITY

Care

188

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead

to surface damage.◀

Rubber seals

Only treat with water or a rubber care product.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use silicone

sprays or other care products containing sili‐

cone; otherwise, noise and damage may result.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radia‐

tor grille or door handles with an ample supply

of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐

ularly when they have been exposed to road

salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome

polish.

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the wheels on the vehicle, only

use a neutral wheel rim cleaner with a pH value

of 5 to 9.

Do not use abrasive cleaners or a steam jet hot‐

ter than 140 ℉/60 ℃; otherwise, damage may

result. Adhere to the manufacturer instructions.

Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaners may de‐

stroy the protective coating of neighboring

components such as the brake disc.

Exterior sensors

The sensors on the outside of the vehicle, such

as for Park Distance Control, must be kept clean

and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully

functional.

Decorative trim

Clean decorative trims and fine wood compo‐

nents with a moist cloth only. Then dry with a

soft cloth.

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and

thus have a negative impact on safety.

No chemical cleaning

Do not clean chemically; this can destroy

the webbing.◀

Carpets/floor mats

No objects in the area around the pedals

Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other

objects out of the area of motion of the pedals;

otherwise, the function of the pedals could be

impeded while driving

Do not place additional floor mats over existing

mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved

for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in

place.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened

again when they are returned after being re‐

moved, such as for cleaning.◀

Floor mats can be removed for cleaning.

If they are very dirty, clean with a microfiber

cloth and water or an interior cleaner. To pre‐

vent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth

in the direction of travel only.

Displays

To clean the displays, such as the radio or dis‐

play elements, use an antistatic microfiber

cloth.

Cleaning displays

Do not use chemical or household cleans‐

ers.

Keep all fluids and moisture away from the

unit.

Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐

ces or electrical components.

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do

not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage

can result.◀

Seite 189

Care

MOBILITY

189

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

CD/DVD drives

No cleaning CD

Do not use cleaning CDs; otherwise, parts

of the drive may become damaged.◀

Long-term vehicle storage

Your service center can advise you on what to

consider when storing the vehicle for longer

than three months.

Seite 190

MOBILITY

Care

190

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Indicator/warning lamps

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Overview

The indicator and warning lights can light up in

a variety of combinations and colors in display

area 1 or 2. The table contains information on

causes and how to respond. Note whether a

lamp lights up alone or in combination with an‐

other. Some lights can light up in different col‐

ors. Corresponding distinctions are made in the

text.

1 2 Cause How to respond

Turn signal

The high-beams/headlight flasher are

switched on.

The front fog lamps are switched on.

The rear fog lights are switched on.

Fasten safety belts. Fasten safety belt, refer to page 39.

External temperature warning Drive conservatively, refer to

page 58.

Seite 191

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

191

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up briefly:

Approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters of fuel remain in

the tank.

Remains on:

The remaining range is no more than

30 miles/50 km, refer to page 59.

The engine refuses to start. Depress the brake or clutch to start

the engine, refer to page 49.

The ignition is switched on and driver's door

is open.

Switch off the ignition, refer to

page 48, or close the driver's door.

The lights are still switched on. Switch off the lights, refer to

page 66.

The roadside parking lamps are still on. Switch off the roadside parking

lights, refer to page 67.

A door is open.

The hood is open.

The tailgate is open.

The fuel cap is missing or loose. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor‐

rectly positioned and close it until it

clicks audibly. Do not jam the strap

between the fuel cap and the vehi‐

cle.

The windshield washer fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid, refer to page 54,

as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.

Check the service requirements, re‐

fer to page 169.

Seite 192

MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lamps

192

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up in yellow:

The engine will start the next time the Start/

Stop button is touched, possibly without the

brake or clutch being depressed.

The remote control is malfunctioning or, in

cars with Comfort Access, was not detected.

The engine cannot be started. Have

the remote control checked, if nec‐

essary.

The battery in the remote control is dis‐

charged.

Use the remote control for a longer

journey or, in cars with Comfort Ac‐

cess, replace the battery.

The belt tensioners and/or airbag system

has failed.

Have the system checked immedi‐

ately.

Fasten the safety belts anyway.

Steering assistance has failed. You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Markedly different

steering response. Have the system

checked as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

Engine malfunction Stop the car and switch off the en‐

gine. You cannot continue your

journey. Contact your service cen‐

ter.

Lights up in yellow:

Full engine power is no longer available. You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the engine

checked as soon as possible.

Indicator lamp 1 flashes:

Engine malfunction under high load. High

engine load will result in damage to the cat‐

alytic converter.

You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the vehicle

checked immediately.

Seite 193

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

193

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indicator lamp 1 lights up:

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on

emissions.

You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the vehicle

checked as soon as possible.

Lights up in red:

The engine is overheating. Carefully bring the car to a stop,

switch off the engine and allow it to

cool down. Do not open the hood;

otherwise, there would be a risk of

injury due to scalding. Contact your

service center.

Lights up in yellow:

The engine is too hot. Continue driving at more moderate

speed so that the engine can cool

down. Have the engine checked

without delay if the situation reoc‐

curs.

Lights up in red:

Battery is no longer being charged. Alterna‐

tor malfunction.

Switch off all unnecessary electrical

consumers. Have the power supply

system checked without delay.

Lights up in yellow:

The battery charge level is very low, the bat‐

tery is old or is not securely connected.

Charge the battery by taking a long

drive or using an external charger.

If necessary, switch off automatic

power consumers. Have the battery

checked as soon as possible.

Indication in US models

The parking brake is set.

Indication in Canadian models

The parking brake is set.

Seite 194

MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lamps

194

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indication in US models

The parking brake is set while driving.

Release the parking brake.

Indication in Canadian models

The parking brake is set while driving.

Release the parking brake.

Indication in US models

Lights up in red:

The brake fluid level is too low.

Reduced braking effect, stop the

car carefully. Contact the nearest

service center.

Indication in Canadian models

Lights up in red:

The brake fluid level is too low.

Reduced braking effect, stop the

car carefully. Contact the nearest

service center.

Indication in US models.

Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brake

pads checked without delay.

Indication in Canadian models

Brake pads worn. Have the condition of the brake

pads checked without delay.

Indication in US models

The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.

Contact your service center.

Seite 195

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

195

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Indication in Canadian models

The vehicle electronics have failed. You cannot continue your journey.

Contact your service center.

Lights up in red: Have the system in question

checked immediately.

The starter has failed or The engine cannot be restarted.

Ignition malfunctioning. The engine can

only be restarted when the brake is de‐

pressed or

Lighting system failed. Low beams/tail lights

and brake lights still operational. All other

lights failed.

Depress the brake to restart the en‐

gine.

Lights up in yellow:

Brake light control failed or

The fuel supply is malfunctioning.

You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the system in

question checked immediately.

Drive malfunctioning. You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Transmission limp-

home program with reduced accel‐

eration is active. Have the system

checked immediately.

Flashing:

Dynamic Stability Control DSC or Dynamic

Traction Control DTC is controlling drive and

braking forces, refer to page 81.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated,

refer to page 82.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC and Dynamic

Traction Control DTC are deactivated, refer

to page 81.

Driving stability limited during ac‐

celeration and cornering.

Driving style must be readjusted.

Seite 196

MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lamps

196

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Dynamic Stability Control DSC and Dynamic

Traction Control DTC failed.

Driving stability limited during ac‐

celeration and cornering.

You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the system

checked as soon as possible.

ALL4 all-wheel drive failed. It is possible to continue driving.

Drive cautiously and defensively.

Avoid operating on poor roads and

using the full throttle and kickdown

positions of the accelerator. Have

the system checked immediately.

ALL4 all-wheel drive and DSC failed. It is possible to continue driving.

Drive cautiously and defensively.

Avoid operating on poor roads and

using the full throttle and kickdown

positions of the accelerator. Have

the system checked immediately.

Indication in US models

The driving stability control systems includ‐

ing ABS and the Tire Pressure Monitor dis‐

play have failed, refer to page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐

ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐

sively. Avoid full brake application,

operation on poor roads, and use

of full throttle and kickdown posi‐

tions of the accelerator. Have the

system checked immediately.

Indication in US models

Seite 197

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

197

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

The driving stability control systems includ‐

ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the Tire

Pressure Monitor display have failed, refer

to page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐

ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐

sively. Avoid full brake application,

operation on poor roads, and use

of full throttle and kickdown posi‐

tions of the accelerator. Have the

system checked immediately.

Indication in Canadian models

The driving stability control systems includ‐

ing ABS and the Flat Tire Monitor or the Tire

Pressure Monitor have failed, refer to

page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐

ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐

sively. Avoid full brake application,

operation on poor roads, and use

of full throttle and kickdown posi‐

tions of the accelerator. Have the

system checked immediately.

Indication in Canadian models

The driving stability control systems includ‐

ing ABS, ALL4 all-wheel drive, and the Flat

Tire Monitor or the Tire Pressure Monitor

have failed, refer to page 81.

Reduced braking and driving stabil‐

ity. Drive cautiously and defen‐

sively. Avoid full brake application,

operation on poor roads, and use

of full throttle and kickdown posi‐

tions of the accelerator. Have the

system checked immediately.

In vehicles with the Flat Tire Monitor

Light up in yellow and red:

A tire is deflated.

Carefully bring the car to a stop.

Additional information, refer to

page 74.

Seite 198

MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lamps

198

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

The Flat Tire Monitor was not initialized. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer

to page 74.

Light up in yellow:

Flat Tire Monitor failed. Punctures are not

indicated.

Have the system checked.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

Light up in yellow and red:

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire

pressure.

Carefully bring the car to a stop.

Additional information, refer to

page 76.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

Light up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor not initialized. Check the inflation pressure and re‐

set the system, refer to page 76.

The small light flashes yellow and then stays

on, the large light lights up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures are

not indicated.

Have the system checked.

A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted.

Have the system checked.

TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to

other systems or devices using the same

radio frequency.

In vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor

The small light flashes yellow and then stays

on, the large light lights up in yellow:

Tire Pressure Monitor failed. Punctures are

not indicated.

Have the system checked.

A wheel without TPM electronics is

mounted.

Have the system checked.

Seite 199

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

199

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Lights up in red:

Transmission limp-home program active

with restricted range of gears, possibly with

reduced acceleration.

You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the system

checked immediately.

Gears can be engaged without depressing

the brake.

Always depress the brake to en‐

gage a gear.

Automatic selector lever locked: Manually unlock the selector lever

lock, refer to page 57.

Lights up in yellow: Have the system checked as soon

as possible.

Automatic selector lever locked:

The selector lever is locked in position P

with the engine running or the ignition

switched on and the brake depressed or

Manually unlock the selector lever

lock, refer to page 57.

The brake signal is malfunctioning: a gear

can be engaged without depressing the

brake.

To engage a gear while the vehicle

is at a standstill, always depress the

brake. Before leaving the vehicle,

move the selector lever to position

P and switch off the engine.

Lights up in red:

The transmission is overheating. Bring the car to a stop and move

the selector lever to position P. Al‐

low the transmission to cool down.

You can continue your journey, but

moderate your speed and exercise

due caution. Have the system

checked if the situation reoccurs.

Lights up in yellow:

The transmission is too hot. Avoid high engine loads. You can

continue your journey, but moder‐

ate your speed and exercise due

caution.

Seite 200

MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lamps

200

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

Selector lever position P not engaged. The

vehicle is not secured against rolling.

Selector lever position P not engaged. The

ignition cannot be switched off.

Engage selector lever position P

when you wish to switch off the ig‐

nition, refer to page 48.

The cruise control system has failed. Have the system checked.

The Park Distance Control has failed. Have the system checked.

A bulb of the exterior lighting system has

failed.

Have the exterior lighting checked

as soon as possible.

A low-beam headlight or front fog light has

failed.

Have the lights checked as soon as

possible.

A high-beam headlight has failed. Have the high-beam headlights

checked.

A rear fog light has failed. Have the rear fog lights checked.

The headlight beam throw adjustment has

failed.

Have the headlight beam throw

adjustment system checked.

The Adaptive Light Control has failed.

The coolant level is too low.

Add coolant immediately, refer to

page 168.

The engine oil pressure is too low. Stop immediately and switch off

the engine. You cannot continue

your journey. Contact your service

center.

Lights up in red:

Seite 201

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

201

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

1 2 Cause How to respond

The service appointment is overdue. Arrange a service appointment.

Check the service requirements, re‐

fer to page 63.

Lights up in yellow:

Service is due. Arrange a service appointment.

Check the service requirements, re‐

fer to page 63.

No service due.

The set speed limit was exceeded.

The time and date are no longer correct.

Set the time and date, refer to

page 62.

Seite 202

MOBILITY

Indicator/warning lamps

202

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Seite 203

Indicator/warning lamps

MOBILITY

203

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

FIND ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

ENTERTAINMENT

COMMUNICATION

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Technical data

Vehicle equipment

This chapter describes all series equipment as

well as country-specific and special equipment

offered for this model series. Therefore, it also

describes equipment that may not be found in

your vehicle, for instance due to the selected

special equipment or the country version. This

also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐

tems.

When using the features and systems described

here, adhere to local regulations.

Note

The technical data and specifications in this

Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.

The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,

for example, due to the selected special equip‐

ment, country version or country-specific

measurement method. Detailed values can be

found in the approval documents, on informa‐

tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained

from the service center.

The information in the vehicle documents al‐

ways has priority.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the

model version, equipment or country-specific

measurement method.

The specified heights do not take into account

attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,

for example, due to the selected special equip‐

ment, tires, load and chassis version.

MINI Countryman

MINI Countryman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789 70.4/1,789

Height inches/mm 61.7/1,566 61.7/1,566 61.4/1,560

Length

With aerodynamic bumper

inches/mm

161.7/4,107

162.2/4,119

163.2/4,144

163.1/4,143

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595 102.2/2,595

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

Seite 206

REFERENCE

Technical data

206

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI Paceman

MINI Paceman Cooper Cooper S John Cooper Works

Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996 78.6/1,996

Width without mirrors inches/mm 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786 70.3/1,786

Height inches/mm 60.4/1,533 60.4/1,533 60.1/1,527

Length

With aerodynamic bumper

inches/mm

162.2/4,119

162.4/4,124

162.8/4,134

Wheelbase inches/mm 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596 102.2/2,596

Smallest turning circle dia. ft/m 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6 38.1/11.6

Weights

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or

the gross vehicle weight.

MINI Countryman

Cooper Cooper S

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,860/1,751 3,990/1,810

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,925/1,780 4,035/1,830

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,060/934 2,145/973

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,125/964 2,200/998

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,920/871 1,920/871

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 4,100/1,860 4,155/1,885

Seite 207

Technical data

REFERENCE

207

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Cooper S ALL4 John Cooper Works

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 4,145/1,880 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,210/1,002 2,210/1,002

Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,260/1,025 2,260/1,025

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,015/914 2,070/939

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liter 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170 17.5-42.2/ 350–1,170

MINI Paceman

Cooper Cooper S Cooper S ALL4

John Cooper Works

Approved gross vehicle weight

Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 3,960/1,796 4,100/1,860 4,150/1,882

Steptronic transmis‐

sion

lbs/kg 3,920/1,778 4,010/1,819 4,140/1,878 4,200/1,905

Load lbs/kg 830/376 830/376 830/376 830/376

Approved front axle load

Manual transmission lbs/kg 2,050/930 2,120/962 2,180/989 2,200/998

Steptronic transmis‐

sion

lbs/kg 2,120/962 2,170/984 2,220/1,007 2,240/1,016

Approved rear axle

load

lbs/kg 1,910/866 1,910/866 2,020/916 2,060/934

Approved roof load ca‐

pacity

lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75

Cargo area capacity cu ft/

liter

13.9-40.7/

330–1,080

13.9-40.7/

330–1,080

13.9-40.7/

330–1,080

13.9-40.7/

330–1,080

Seite 208

REFERENCE

Technical data

208

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 12.4/47 Fuel quality, refer to

page 150

Seite 209

Technical data

REFERENCE

209

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Everything from A to Z

Index

ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐

tem 81

Acoustic signal, refer to Check

Control 64

Activated charcoal filter with

automatic climate con‐

trol 92

Adaptive Light Control 68

Additives, engine oil 167

Airbags 71

Airbags, indicator/warning

light 74

Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated air mode, air condi‐

tioner 89

Air circulation, refer to Recir‐

culated air mode, automatic

climate control 91

Air conditioning 88

Air conditioning mode, air

conditioner 88

Air conditioning mode, auto‐

matic climate control 90

Air distribution, air condi‐

tioner, manual 89

Air distribution, automatic 91

Air distribution, automatic cli‐

mate control, manual 92

Air distribution, individual 89

Air drying, refer to Cooling

function 92

Air flow rate for air condi‐

tioner 89

Air flow rate with automatic

climate control 91

Air pressure, refer to Tire infla‐

tion pressure 152

Air supply, air conditioner 88

Air supply, automatic climate

control 90

Alarm system 30

Alarm system, avoiding unin‐

tentional alarms 31

Alarm system, ending an

alarm 30

Alarm system, interior motion

sensor 31

Alarm system, tilt alarm sen‐

sor 31

ALL4 all-wheel system 83

All-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 83

Alternating-code hand-held

transmitter 95

Ambient lighting 70

Antifreeze, washer fluid 54

Antilock Brake System,

ABS 81

Anti-slip control, refer to Dy‐

namic Stability Control

DSC 81

Anti-theft protection 21

Approved engine oils 167

Ashtray 98

Assistance, roadside 181

Assistance when driving off,

refer to Hill drive-off assis‐

tant 83

Assistance with starting en‐

gine, refer to Jump-start‐

ing 181

Automatic air distribution 91

Automatic air flow 91

Automatic car wash 186

Automatic climate control 90

Automatic climate control, au‐

tomatic air distribution 91

Automatic, cruise control 85

Automatic headlight con‐

trol 66

Automatic transmission with

Steptronic 55

AUTO program with auto‐

matic climate control 91

AUX-IN port 130

Average fuel consumption 60

Average fuel consumption,

setting the units 61

Average speed 60

Average speed, refer to Com‐

puter 59

Backrest curvature, refer to

Lumbar support 36

Backrests, refer to Seats 35

Backup lights, bulb replace‐

ment 176

Battery disposal 30

Battery, refer to Vehicle bat‐

tery 179

Battery, remote control 20

Battery replacement, remote

control 30

Belts, refer to Safety belts 37

Belt tensioners, refer to Safety

belts 37

Bi-xenon headlights 172

Brake assistant 81

Brake discs, breaking in 110

Brake fluid, refer to Service re‐

quirements 63

Brake force distribution, elec‐

tronic 81

Brake pads, breaking in 110

Brake, refer to Parking

brake 50

Seite 210

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

210

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Brakes, MINI maintenance

system 169

Brakes, service require‐

ments 63

Brake system, MINI mainte‐

nance system 169

Braking, notes 111

Braking, parking brake 50

Breakdown assistance, Road‐

side Assistance 181

Breaking in 110

Buckle tongue, height adjust‐

ment 38

Button for starting the engine,

refer to Start/Stop button 48

California Proposition 65

Warning 7

Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 179

Car care products 187

Care, displays 189

Care, vehicle 187

Cargo area, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28

Cargo area door, refer to Tail‐

gate 26

Cargo area, enlarging, cargo

cover 100

Cargo area, flat loading

floor 102

Cargo area light, refer to Inte‐

rior lights 69

Cargo area, multi-function

hook 103

Cargo area, opening from the

outside 26

Cargo area, partition net 102

Car horn, refer to Horn 12

Carpet, care 189

Car phone, refer to Tele‐

phone 136

Car wash 186

CBC, Cornering Brake Con‐

trol 81

CBS Condition Based Serv‐

ice 169

CD/DVD drives, care 190

Center armrest 105

Center console, refer to

Around the center con‐

sole 15

Center rail 105

Center rail, refer to Storage

compartments 105

Central locking, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28

Central locking from the in‐

side 25

Central locking system, con‐

cept 21

Central locking system, from

the outside 21

Changes, technical, refer to

Safety 6

Changing wheels/tires 159

Check Control 64

Children, transporting 43

Child restraint fixing system

LATCH 44

Child restraint fixing sys‐

tems 43

Child restraint fixing systems,

mounting 43

Child seat, mounting 43

Child seats, refer to Transport‐

ing children safely 43

Chrome parts, care 189

Circulation of air, refer to Re‐

circulated air mode, air con‐

ditioner 89

Circulation of air, refer to Re‐

circulated air mode, auto‐

matic climate control 91

Cleaning, displays 189

Cleaning, refer to Care 186

Climate 88

Climate mode, ventilation 93

Clock 58

Clock, 12h/24h mode 61

Closing from the inside 25

Closing, from the outside 22

Clutch, breaking in 110

Cockpit 12

Cold start, refer to Starting the

engine 49

Combination instrument, refer

to Displays 14

Combination switch, refer to

Turn signal/high-beams/

headlight flasher 51

Combination switch, refer to

Washer/wiper system 52

Comfort Access 28

Comfort Access, in the car

wash 29

Comfort Access, replacing the

battery 30

Comfort area, refer to Around

the center console 15

Compartment for remote con‐

trol, refer to Ignition lock 48

Compass, digital 96

Computer 59

Computer, displaying informa‐

tion 59

Condition Based Service

CBS 169

Confirmation signals for vehi‐

cle locking/unlocking 23

Consumption, refer to Aver‐

age fuel consumption 60

Control Display, care 189

Controls and displays 12

Control systems, driving stabil‐

ity 81

Convenient operation, win‐

dow 23

Coolant temperature 59

Cooling function, switching on

and off 92

Cooling, maximum 91

Cornering Brake Control,

CBC 81

Corrosion on brake discs 112

Seite 211

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

211

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Cradle for telephone or mobile

phone, refer to Snap-in

adapter 143

Cruise control 85

Cupholders 98

Current fuel consumption 60

Curve lights, refer to Adaptive

Light Control 68

Dashboard lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 69

Dashboard, refer to Cock‐

pit 12

Dashboard, refer to Dis‐

plays 14

Date, display format 61

Date, setting 62

Daytime running lights 67

Decorative trim, care 189

Defogging windows 89

Defroster, rear window, auto‐

matic climate control 92

Defroster, rear window, with

air conditioner 89

Defrosting windows 89

Defrost setting, refer to De‐

frosting windows 89

Digital compass 96

Dip stick, engine oil 166

Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 51

Display lighting, refer to In‐

strument lighting 69

Displays 14

Displays and controls 12

Displays, care 189

Displays, cleaning 189

Displays, refer to Instrument

cluster 14

Disposal, remote control bat‐

tery 30

Distance warning, refer to

Park Distance Control

PDC 86

Door key, refer to Remote

control with integrated

key 20

Door lock 24

Door lock, confirmation sig‐

nals 23

Doors, manual operation 25

Doors, unlocking and locking,

confirmation signals 23

Doors, unlocking and locking

from the inside 25

Doors, unlocking and locking,

from the outside 22

DOT Quality Grades 156

Drive-off assistant, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 83

Driving notes, breaking

in 110

Driving off on hills, refer to Hill

drive-off assistant 83

Driving on poor roads 113

Driving stability control sys‐

tems 81

Driving tips, refer to Driving

notes 110

Dry air, refer to Cooling func‐

tion 92

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 81

DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐

trol 82

Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 81

Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 82

Electrical malfunction, door

lock 25

Electrical malfunction, fuel

filler flap 148

Electronic brake-force distri‐

bution 81

Electronic Stability Program

ESP, refer to Dynamic Stabil‐

ity Control DSC 81

Emergency operation, fuel

filler flap, unlocking man‐

ually 148

Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation 25

Emergency operation, Step‐

tronic transmission, refer to

Selector lever lock, overrid‐

ing 57

Energy, saving, refer to Saving

fuel 118

Engine, breaking in 110

Engine compartment 164

Engine oil, adding 166

Engine oil, additives, refer to

Approved engine oils 167

Engine oil, alternative oil

types 167

Engine oil change intervals,

refer to Service require‐

ments 63

Engine oil, dip stick 166

Engine oil, filling capacity 209

Engine oil, MINI maintenance

system 169

Engine oil types, alterna‐

tive 167

Engine oil types, ap‐

proved 167

Engine, overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 59

Engine start, assistance 181

Engine, starting 49

Engine, starting, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28

Engine, starting, Start/Stop

button 48

Engine, stopping, Start/Stop

button 48

Engine, switching off 50

Equipment, interior 94

Seite 212

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

212

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐

gram, refer to Dynamic Sta‐

bility Control DSC 81

Exchanging wheels/tires 159

Exterior mirrors 40

Exterior mirrors, adjusting 40

Exterior mirrors, folding in and

out 41

Exterior sensors, care 189

External temperature dis‐

play 58

External temperature display,

changing the units 61

External temperature warn‐

ing 58

Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 64

False alarm, refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 31

Fan, refer to Air flow rate for

air conditioner 89

Fan, refer to Air flow rate with

automatic climate con‐

trol 91

Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 37

Fault messages, refer to Check

Control 64

Filling capacities 209

Filter, refer to Activated-char‐

coal filter 90

Filter, refer to Microfilter 90

Filter, refer to Microfilter/acti‐

vated-charcoal filter with au‐

tomatic climate control 92

First aid kit 181

First aid, refer to First aid

kit 181

Flashing when locking/unlock‐

ing 23

Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor 75

Flat tire, indicator/warning

lamp 75

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 74

Flat Tire Monitor FTM, flat tire

message 75

Flat Tire Monitor FTM, initializ‐

ing the system 74

Flat Tire Monitor FTM, snow

chains 74

Flat Tire Monitor FTM, system

limits 74

Flat tire, run-flat tire 75

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor 76

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 76

Flat tire, wheel change 178

Floor mats, care 189

Fog lights 69

Foot brake 111

Footwell lights, refer to Inte‐

rior lights 69

Four-wheel drive, refer to

ALL4 83

Front airbags 71

Front fog light, bulb replace‐

ment 174

Front fog lights 69

Front lights, bulb replace‐

ment 173

Front passenger airbags, de‐

activating 72

FTM Flat Tire Monitor 74

Fuel 150

Fuel, additives 150

Fuel, average consump‐

tion 60

Fuel cap, closing 148

Fuel consumption display,

average fuel consump‐

tion 60

Fuel filler flap, closing 148

Fuel filler flap, opening 148

Fuel filler flap, unlocking in

case of an electrical malfunc‐

tion 148

Fuel gauge 59

Fuel, refer to Average fuel

consumption 60

Fuel, saving 118

Fuel tank capacity, refer to

Filling capacities 209

Fuel tank contents, refer to

Filling capacities 209

Fuel tank, refer to Filling ca‐

pacities 209

Fuse 179

Garage door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote

control 94

Gasoline 150

Gasoline gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 59

Gear change, manual trans‐

mission 55

Gear change, Steptronic trans‐

mission 56

Gear display, Steptronic trans‐

mission 55

Glare protection 96

Glass sunroof, electrical 31

Glass sunroof, electrical, open‐

ing/closing 32

Glass sunroof, electrical, rais‐

ing 32

Glass sunroof, electric, con‐

venient operation 23

Glass sunroof, electric, remote

control 23

Halogen headlights, bulb re‐

placement 173

Handbrake, refer to Parking

brake 50

Hand car wash, care 187

Hand-held transmitter, alter‐

nating code 95

Hands-free microphone 15

Seite 213

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

213

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Hazard warning system 15

Head airbags 71

Headlamp control, refer to

Parking lamps/low

beams 66

Headlamps, care 187

Headlight control, auto‐

matic 66

Headlight courtesy delay fea‐

ture 68

Headlight flasher 51

Headlights 66

Headlights, cleaning, washer

fluid 54

Head restraints 39

Head restraints, adjusting the

height 39

Head restraints, removing 40

Heatable rear window, air

conditioner 89

Heatable windshield 92

Heating, rear window with au‐

tomatic climate control 92

Heating, seats 37

Heating, windshield 92

Height adjustment, seats 35

High-beams 67

High beams, bulb replace‐

ment 173

Hill drive-off assistant 83

Hills 112

Holder for remote control, re‐

fer to Ignition lock 48

Homepage 6

Hood 165

Hood, closing 165

Hood, opening 165

Hood, unlocking 165

Horn 12

Hydraulic brake assistant 81

Ice warning, refer to External

temperature warning 58

Icy roads, refer to External

temperature warning 58

Identification marks, run-flat

tires 160

Identification marks, tires 156

Ignition 49

Ignition key position 1, refer

to Radio ready state 48

Ignition key position 2, refer

to Ignition on 49

Ignition key, refer to Remote

control with integrated

key 20

Ignition lock 48

Ignition, switched off 49

Ignition, switched on 49

Indicator and warning lamps,

overview 191

Indicator and warning lamps,

Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 77

Indicator and warning

lights 15

Individual air distribution 89

Inflation pressure monitor, re‐

fer to Flat Tire Monitor 74

Inflation pressure monitor, re‐

fer to Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 76

Inflation pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 152

Initializing, compass, refer to

Calibrating 97

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 74

Initializing, glass sunroof,

electrical 32

Instrument cluster, refer to

Displays 14

Instrument lighting 69

Instruments, refer to Cock‐

pit 12

Integrated key 20

Integrated universal remote

control 94

Interior equipment 94

Interior lights 69

Interior lights, remote con‐

trol 24

Interior mirror 41

Interior motion sensor 31

Interior rearview mirror, com‐

pass 96

Interior temperature, setting,

air conditioner 88

Interior temperature, setting,

automatic climate con‐

trol 90

Internet page 6

Jump-starting 181

Keyless Go, refer to Comfort

Access 28

Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort Access 28

Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 20

Key, refer to Remote control

with integrated key 20

Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐

mission 56

Knee airbag 71

Knocking control 150

Lamp and bulb replacement,

bulb replacement 172

Lamp, replacing, refer to

Lamp and bulb replace‐

ment 172

Lamps 66

Lamps, automatic headlight

control 66

Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer

to Safety belts 37

Seite 214

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

214

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

LATCH child restraint fixing

system 44

Leather, care 188

Leather care 188

LEDs, light-emitting di‐

odes 172

License plate light, bulb re‐

placement 176

Light-alloy wheels, care 189

Light-emitting diodes,

LEDs 172

Lighter, socket 98

Lighting, instruments 69

Lighting, lamp and bulb re‐

placement 172

Lighting, vehicle, refer to

Lamps 66

Lights, parking lamps/low

beams 66

Light switch 66

Lock buttons on doors, refer

to Locking 25

Locking from the inside 25

Locking, from the outside 23

Locking, setting the confirma‐

tion signal 23

Locking the vehicle from the

inside 25

Locking vehicle, from the out‐

side 22

Locking without remote con‐

trol, refer to Comfort Ac‐

cess 28

Longlife oils, alternative oil

types 167

Longlife oils, refer to Ap‐

proved engine oils 167

Low beams 66

Low beams, automatic 66

Low beams, bulb replace‐

ment 173

Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 36

Main inspection, refer to Serv‐

ice requirements 63

Maintenance, refer to Service

booklet

Maintenance, refer to Service

requirements 63

Maintenance require‐

ments 169

Maintenance system

MINI 169

Makeup mirror 96

Malfunction, door lock 25

Malfunction, fuel filler

flap 148

Malfunction, Steptronic trans‐

mission 57

Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 64

Manual air distribution, air

conditioner 89

Manual air distribution, auto‐

matic climate control 92

Manual mode, Steptronic

transmission 56

Manual operation, door

lock 25

Manual operation, fuel filler

flap 148

Manual operation, selector

lever lock, Steptronic trans‐

mission 57

Marking on approved

tires 159

Maximum cooling 91

Maximum speed, winter

tires 160

Microfilter 90

Microfilter, with automatic cli‐

mate control 92

MINI Homepage 6

MINI Internet page 6

MINI maintenance sys‐

tem 169

MINI Mobility System 161

Minimum tread, tires 158

Mirrors 40

Mirrors, folding in and out 41

Mirrors, interior mirror 41

Mobile communication devi‐

ces in the vehicle 111

Mobile phone, refer to Tele‐

phone 136

Mobility System 161

Modifications, technical, refer

to Safety 6

Mounting of child restraint fix‐

ing systems 43

Neck restraints, refer to Head

restraints 39

New wheels and tires 159

Notes 6

Nozzles, refer to Ventila‐

tion 93

OBD Onboard Diagnos‐

tics 170

OBD socket, refer to Socket

for OBD Onboard Diagno‐

sis 170

Octane number, refer to Fuel

quality 150

Octane rating, refer to Recom‐

mended fuel grade 150

Odometer 58

Oil additives 167

Oil level 166

Oil types, alternative 167

Oil types, approved 167

Onboard Diagnostics

OBD 170

Opening and closing, Comfort

Access 28

Opening and closing from the

inside 25

Seite 215

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

215

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Opening and closing, from the

outside 22

Opening and closing, using

the door lock 24

Opening and closing, via the

remote control 22

Opening and unlocking from

the inside 25

Outside air mode, automatic

climate control 91

Outside air, refer to Recircu‐

lated air mode, air condi‐

tioner 89

Outside air, refer to Recircu‐

lated air mode, automatic

climate control 91

Overheating of engine, refer

to Coolant temperature 59

Park Distance Control PDC 86

Parking aid, refer to Park Dis‐

tance Control PDC 86

Parking assistant, refer to Park

Distance Control PDC 86

Parking brake 50

Parking light, bulb replace‐

ment 174

Parking lights 66

Parking lights/low beams 66

PDC Park Distance Control 86

Personal Profile 20

Pinch protection, windows 33

Pivoting sun visor 96

Plastic, care 188

Pollen, refer to Microfilter 90

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 90

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter with

automatic climate con‐

trol 92

Poor road operation 113

Power windows 33

Power windows, refer to Win‐

dows 32

Prescribed engine oils, refer to

Approved engine oils 167

Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 76

Pressure, tires 152

Pressure warning, tires 74

Profile depth, refer to Mini‐

mum tread depth 158

Profile, tires 157

Protective function, refer to

Pinch protection system,

windows 33

Radio MINI Boost CD 122

Radio-operated key, refer to

Remote control with

integrated key 20

Radio ready state 48

Radio ready state, switched

off 49

Radio ready state, switched

on 48

Radio setting, refer to Radio

ready state 48

Rain sensor 52

Range 60

Rear 36

Rear fog light, bulb replace‐

ment 176

Rear lights, refer to Tail

lights 176

Rear seat backrests, foldable,

MINI Countryman 100

Rear seat backrests, foldable,

MINI Paceman 101

Rearview mirror, refer to Mir‐

rors 40

Rear window defroster with

air conditioner 89

Rear window defroster with

automatic climate con‐

trol 92

Rear window, washing 54

Rear window wiper 54

Recirculated air mode, air

conditioner 89

Recirculated air mode, auto‐

matic climate control 91

Recommended fuel

grade 150

Recommended tire

brands 159

Releasing, refer to Unlock‐

ing 28

Remaining range for service,

refer to Service require‐

ments 63

Remaining range, refer to

Range 60

Remote control 20

Remote control, battery re‐

placement 30

Remote control, Comfort Ac‐

cess 28

Remote control, Comfort Ac‐

cess, malfunctions 29

Remote control, garage door

opener 94

Remote control, radio interfer‐

ence 24

Remote control, removing

from the ignition lock 48

Remote control, service

data 169

Remote control, universal 94

Replacement remote con‐

trol 20

Replacing wheels/tires 159

Reporting safety defects 9

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 59

Reservoir for washer fluid, re‐

fer to Washer fluid reser‐

voir 54

Seite 216

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

216

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Restraining systems, refer to

Safety belts 37

Restraint systems for chil‐

dren 43

Retreaded tires 159

Reverse gear, manual trans‐

mission 55

Roadside Assistance 181

Roadside parking light, bulb

replacement 174

Roadside parking lights 67

RON recommended fuel

grade 150

RON, refer to Fuel quality 150

Rubber seals, care 189

Run-flat tires 160

Run-flat tires, flat tire 75

Run-flat tires, tire inflation

pressure 152

Safe braking 111

Safety 6

Safety belts 37

Safety belts, care 189

Safety belts, damage 39

Safety belts, indicator/warning

lamp 39

Safety belts, rear center safety

belt 38

Safety belts, reminder 39

Safety systems, airbags 71

Safety systems, safety

belts 37

Saving fuel 118

Seat adjustment 36

Seat adjustment, manual 35

Seat heating 37

Seats 35

Seats, adjusting 35

Seats, heating 37

Seats, sitting safely 35

Selector lever lock, overrid‐

ing 57

Selector lever lock, refer to Se‐

lector level positions, chang‐

ing, shiftlock 56

Selector lever positions, Step‐

tronic transmission 56

Selector lever, Steptronic

transmission 56

Service and warranty 7

Service data in the remote

control 169

Service interval display, refer

to Condition Based Service

CBS 169

Service interval display, refer

to Service requirements 63

Service requirements 63

Service requirements, CBS

Condition Based Service 169

Settings and information 60

Settings, clock 61

Settings, configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 20

Shifting, manual transmis‐

sion 55

Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐

sion 56

Shift lever, Steptronic trans‐

mission 56

Shift paddles on the steering

wheel 57

Side airbags 71

Side windows, refer to Win‐

dows 32

Sitting safely 35

Sliding/tilting sunroof, refer to

Glass sunroof, electrical 31

Slot for remote control 48

Snap-in adapter, mobile

phone 143

Snow chains 163

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagno‐

sis 170

Special equipment, series

equipment 6

Speed, average 60

Speedometer 14

Speed, with winter tires 160

Sport button 83

Sport program, Steptronic

transmission 56

Stability control systems 81

Start/Stop button 48

Start/Stop button, starting the

engine 49

Start/Stop button, switching

off the engine 50

Starting the engine 49

Start problems, refer to Jump-

starting 181

Steering wheel 42

Steering wheel, adjusting 42

Steering wheel lock 48

Steering wheel, shift pad‐

dles 57

Steptronic transmission 55

Steptronic transmission, kick‐

down 56

Steptronic transmission, over‐

riding the selector lever

lock 57

Stopping, engine 50

Storage, tires 160

Storing the vehicle 190

Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 152

Summer tires, tread 157

Sun visor 96

Switches, refer to Cockpit 12

Switching off, engine 50

Switching off, vehicle 50

Symbols 6

Tachometer 59

Tailgate 26

Tailgate, Comfort Access 28

Tailgate, opening/closing 26

Tailgate, opening from the

outside 26

Tail lights 176

Seite 217

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

217

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Tank gauge, refer to Fuel

gauge 59

Technical changes, refer to

Safety 6

Telephone 136

Temperature, air condi‐

tioner 89

Temperature, automatic cli‐

mate control 92

Temperature, coolant, refer to

Coolant temperature 59

Temperature display

– External temperature warn‐

ing 58

Temperature display, external

temperature 58

Temperature display, setting

the units 61

Temperature warning 58

Theft alarm system, refer to

Alarm system 30

Tilt alarm sensor 31

Time, setting the time 62

Tire age 158

Tire, flat tire 75

Tire identification marks 156

Tire inflation pressure 152

Tire inflation pressure, pres‐

sure loss, FTM 75

Tire pressure loss, RDC 77

Tire, pressure monitoring, re‐

fer to Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 76

Tire pressure monitor, refer to

Flat Tire Monitor 74

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 76

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

system limits 79

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

system reset 77

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM,

warning lamp 77

Tire Quality Grading 156

Tires, breaking in 110

Tires, changing 159

Tires, condition 157

Tires, damage 158

Tire size 156

Tires, minimum tread 158

Tires, retreaded tires 159

Tires, storage 160

Tire tread 157

Towing another vehicle 183

Towing, being towed 183

Tow-starting 183

TPM, refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 76

Traction control 82

Transmission lock, refer to

Changing the selector lever

positions 56

Transmission, overriding the

selector lever lock with Step‐

tronic transmission 57

Transmission, refer to Manual

transmission 55

Transmission, see Steptronic

transmission 55

Transporting children

safely 43

Trip-distance counter, refer to

Trip odometer 58

Triple turn signal activa‐

tion 51

Trip odometer 58

Trunk lid, refer to Tailgate 26

Trunk, refer to Cargo area 26

Turning lights, refer to Adap‐

tive Light Control 68

Turn signal, bulb replace‐

ment 174

Turn signal indicator lamp 14

Turn signals 51

Turn signals, triple turn signal

activation 51

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/

UTQG 156

Unintentional alarms, avoid‐

ing 31

Units, average fuel consump‐

tion 61

Units, temperature 61

Universal remote control 94

Unlocking from the inside 25

Unlocking, from the out‐

side 22

Unlocking, tailgate 28

Unlocking, without remote

control, refer to Comfort Ac‐

cess 28

Upholstery care 188

Upholstery material care 188

USB audio interface 131

Vanity mirror 96

Vehicle battery 179

Vehicle, breaking in 110

Vehicle care 187

Vehicle care, refer to

Care 186

Vehicle equipment 6

Vehicle paintwork, care 188

Vehicle storage 190

Vehicle, switching off 50

Vehicle wash 186

Ventilation, air conditioner 93

Warning and indicator

lamps 15

Warning and indicator lamps,

overview 191

Warning messages, refer to

Check Control 64

Warning triangle 181

Washer/wiper system 52

Washer/wiper system, rain

sensor 52

Washer/wiper system, washer

fluid 54

Washer fluid 54

Washer fluid reservoir 54

Seite 218

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

218

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

Washing, vehicle 186

Welcome lights 68

Wheel change 178

Wheels and tires 152

Wheels, changing 159

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor

FTM 74

Window, convenient opera‐

tion 23

Windows 32

Windows, care 187

Windows, closing 33

Windows, defrosting and de‐

fogging 89

Windows, opening 33

Windows, pinch protection 33

Windshield defroster 92

Windshield, defrosting and

defogging 89

Windshield, defrosting, refer

to Defrosting windows 89

Windshield wash 52

Windshield washer fluid 54

Windshield wash, rear win‐

dow 54

Windshield wash, reservoir for

washer fluid 54

Windshield wash, washer

fluid 54

Windshield wiper blades,

changing 171

Windshield wiper, refer to

Washer/wiper system 52

Winter storage, care 190

Winter tires 159

Winter tires, tread 157

Wiper blades, care 187

Wiper blades, changing 171

Wiper fluid 54

Your individual vehicle, set‐

tings, refer to Personal Pro‐

file 20

Seite 219

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

219

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

01 40 2 961 084 ue

*BL2961084000*

DRIVE ME.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 961 084 - II/15

MINI 2015 paceman

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

MINI 2015 PACEMAN Questions and Answers

Related Products

Canon IVY 2 MINI PHOTO PRINTER

BOYA BY-XM6-S2 MINI Ultracompact 2-Person Wireless Microphone System

Saramonic UWMIC9SKIT1MINI Mini KIT1 Compact Camera-Mount Wireless Omni Lavalier Microphone System

LAUNCH LEPUSHPDJ3427 2023 X431 Pro Mini Bidirectional Scan Tool

Ecosmart ECO MINI 6 ECOMINI6 Electric Mini Tank Water Heater

Ecosmart ECO MINI 2.5 2.5-Gallon 120V Electric Mini Tank Water Heater